Home

Digital Super Hybrid System Programming Guide

1. Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 03 1 16 These bits are provided to assign PAD 0 0dB 0 None 04 1 8 Switch Control volume control of 1 3 dB received calls on an outside line This can be assigned for each outside line The bits 1 through 16 in Area 03 correspond to outside lines 1 through 16 and the bits 1 through 8 in Area 04 correspond to outside lines 17 through 24 The outside lines 9 through 24 are only available for KX TD1232 9 Prevents or allows a call originated by 0 prevent 1 Voice Mail an AA port of VPS to another AA port 1 allow Integration 10 Prevents or allows sending pulse 0 prevent 1 None dialling signals during an outside call 1 allow 11 12 Reserved 13 Enables or disables the pulse feedback 0 disable 1 None sound when a dialled number is sent to 1 enable an outside line 14 16 Reserved ISDN Programming 289 3 5 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 05 1 6 Reserved 7 In the day mode selects the destination 0 DIL 1 N 1 DDI of incoming DDI numbers or MSN 1 operator MSN Ringing numbers when 0 is assigned in Service programmes 151 152 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night and 448 449 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 8 Inthenight mode selects the destination 0 DIL
2. is established just after dialling the feature number for accessing the following features Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Hold Retriev and Call Park Retrieve Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 02 1 Ifan outside party is transferred and 0 initiating 0 Call Transfer unanswered assigns whether Transfer extension Recall occurs at the transfer initiating 1 Operator 1 extension or at Operator 1 2 If the restriction of outside call duration 0 both calls 0 None is enabled in programme 1 outgoing calls 502 E xtension to Outside Line Call only Duration Limit assigns if the restriction is done for both outgoing and incoming calls or for outgoing calls only 3 _ Allows you to remove confirmation tone 0 disable 1 Confirmation 4 By default a beep tone sounds when 1 enable Tone a three party conference is started ended 4 Determines if the dialled X and 0 no check 1 Toll Restriction will be checked byToll Restriction This 1 check assignment is required for certain central offices CO to prevent toll fraud Some COs ignore the user dialled X and f If your CO is such a type select 0 no check 5 Enables or disables the Flash function 0 disable 0 Flash when an outside call is received at a 1 enable locked or toll restricted station Flash if enabled allows the user to make an outside call
3. Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 03 1 16 These bits are provided to assign PAD 0 0dB 0 None 04 1 8 Switch Control volume control of 1 3 dB received calls on an outside line This can be assigned for each outside line The bits 1 through 16 in Area 03 correspond to outside lines 1 through 16 and the bits 1 through 8 in Area 04 correspond to outside lines 17 through 24 The outside lines 9 through 24 are only available for KX TD1232 9 Prevents or allows a call originated by 0 prevent 1 Voice Mail an AA port of VPS to another AA port 1 allow Integration 10 Prevents or allows sending pulse 0 prevent 1 None dialling signals during an outside call 1 allow 11 12 Reserved 13 Enables or disables the pulse feedback 0 disable 1 None sound when a dialled number is sent to 1 enable an outside line 14 16 Reserved 334 E amp M Programming 4 6 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 05 1 6 Reserved 7 In the day mode selects the destination 0 DIL 1 N 1 DDI of incoming DDI numbers or MSN 1 operator MSN Ringing numbers when 0 is assigned in Service programmes 151 1 52 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night and 448 44 9 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 8 Inthe nigh
4. 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 COS1 COS1 4 Enter a primary COS number To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press a gt 6 Enter a secondary COS number To change the current entry enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END General Programming 175 2 7 Extension Programming Conditions There is a maximum of eight Classes of Service Every extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming of programmes 5XX and 991 For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods To assign all jacks to one COS press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Programme 811 DISA TIE User Codes is also used to assign a Class of Service to a DISA Direct Inward System Access TIE User Code Features Guide References Class of Service COS Hotel Application 176 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programm
5. There is a maximum of four access codes per outside line group Each code has one or two digits consisting of 0 through 9 and x e Ifconflicting access codes such as 8 and 81 are stored for the same outside line group the 1 digit code 8 only will be in effect When the programmed codes are dialled Automatic Pause Insertion and Toll Restriction are applied to the calls The programmed pause time in programme 412 Pause Time is automatically inserted after the access code Toassign all outside line groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 Features Guide References External Feature Access Host PBX Access Pause Insertion Automatic General Programming 151 2 5 Outside Line Programming 412 Pause Time Description Assigns the length of the pause time The programmed pause time is automatically inserted after a line access number or a host PBX access code programme din 411 Host PBX Access Codes or manually inserted if the PAUSE button is pressed by the user Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X Xll outside line groups Time seconds 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 Default All outside line groups 4 5 s Programming 1 Enter 412 Display TRG Pause Time 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also pres
6. To change the current entry enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions This time gives the user an opportunity to dial digits before the automatic dialling process takes place Features Guide References Pickup Dialling 106 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 205 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Time Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an outside party If an outside call is originated or answered by a programmed extension user and the timer expires the call is disconnected Selection Time minutes 1 through 64 Default 10 min Programming 1 Enter 205 Display CO Dur Time 2 Press NEXT Display example 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Time 10 min Conditions e This time out applies to extensions to which limited call duration is assigned by programme 50 2 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit This time cannot be set to zero or be left empty Features Guide References None General Programming 107 2 3 Timer Programming 206 O utside to Outside Line Call Duration Time Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation between two outside parties When the timer expires the outside to outside line call is disconnected Selection Time minutes 1 through 64 Default 10
7. 15 16 Reserved 390 DECT Programming 5 4 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 07 1 3 Reserved 4 Allows to access an outside line has the 0 enable 1 Outside Line lowest number among idle lines with 1 disable Access priority Automatic 5 Reserved 6 Selects the result when a DISA DDI 0 reorder tone is 1 None MSN TIE call is invalid sent 1 IRNA 7 Selects the result when a DISA DDI 0 IRNA 1 None MSN TIE call arrives at a busy 1 busy tone is extension which has disabled Call sent Waiting 8 Selects the forwarding destination when 0 destination of 1 Call Forwarding an outside call is transferred from an intercom calls extension or the VPS to an extension 1 destination of where the Call Forwarding has been set incoming outside calls 9 Selects the result when the first digit 0 disconnect 1 None timer or the inter digit timer used for toll 1 do not restriction checking assigned in disconnect programme 207 Fi rst Digit Time or 208 I nter Digit Time expires 10 Enables or disables retry by diall ingx 0 dial X 1 DISA during DISA outside to outside line 1 retry conversation If disabled X will simply be dialled 11 Selects whether the display which is 0 not change 1 Incoming Outside assigned in programme 1 change to Call Informa
8. 10 Press END Conditions The following units can be installed in the slots C 4 CO lines KX TD180 1 2 ISDN S0 lines KX TD280 S2 6 ISDN SO lines KX TD286 S3 1 PRI ISDN line KX TD290 EM 4 E amp M lines KX TD184 E E1 E2 8 Extension lines KX TD170 KX TD144 or KX TD146 A Al A2 16 SLT lines KX TD174 There are two expansion areas in the KX TD816 areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top One extension line unit and one outside line CO ISDN SO E amp M unit can be installed There are three expansion areas in each system for the KX TD1232 areas 1 2 and 3 from bottom to top Up to two extension line units and one outside line CO ISDN S0 E amp M unit can be installed The PRI ISDN line unit can be installed with the ISDN SO line unit but not with the analogue outside line unit An out of service system is unassignable In this case skip steps 8 and 9 for the KX TD1232 For the KX TD1232 if only the Slave System is in operation the display shows Slave in step 2 After changing the setting turn the Power Switch off and on once Otherwise the previous setting will remain Features Guide References None E amp M Programming 303 4 1 System Programming 128 P BX Code Description Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the PBX Code method is employed for TIE Line Network calling Selection PBX Code 1 through 3 digits Default Not stor
9. This programme is available when this system is connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP200 Selection KX TD816 Jack number 02 through 16 KX TD1232 Mast Master Slav Slave e Jack number 02 through 32 Master 33 through 64 Slave Default All jacks Blank Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 117 Display VMS Port Asn 2 Press NEXT To programme the Slave System press NEXT again Display example Mastl 3 Enter a jack number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number Press Winter another jack number Repeat steps 3 through 4 to enter another jack number Press STORE Press END do MW RR General Programming T4 2 2 System Programming KX TD123 1 Enter 117 Display VMS Port Asn 2 Press NEXT to programme the Master System To programme the Slave System press NEXT again Display example Mastl 4 3 Enter a jack numbe To delete the current entry press CLEA To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number Press Winter another jack number Repeat steps 3 through 4 to enter another jack number Press STORE Press NEXT to programme the Slave System SHAN Mm RR Display example Slavl 8 Repeat steps 3 through 4 to enter another jack number 9 Press STORE 10 Press EN
10. disable enable m Voice Mail Integration Selects the result when an outside call is routed to a voice mail port by IRNA For both Inband and DPT Integration When the voice mail port is in the VM service mode enable VM service mode disable The mode will change to the AA service mode Only when Inband When the voice mail port is in the AA service mode enable The mode will change to the VM service mode and a Follow On ID is sent disable AA service mode 0 enable 1 disable Voice Mail Integration ISDN Programming 291 3 5 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 06 8 Enables or disables sending outside line 0 enable 1 E amp M TIE Line access number 9 to a TIE line When 1 disable Service you dial outside line access number 9 and the outside line is busy the system can automatically send outside line access number 9 to a TIE line so that you can access the outside line through another PBX 9 Enables or disables the ARS with 0 enable 1 ARS DTMF function 1 disable 11 10 Assigns the source of Music Source 1 00 internal music 00 e BGM for Music on Hold and BGM source Music on Hold 01 external music source 11 tone 12 Reserved 13 Enables or disables dial tone 2 when an 0 disable 1 Dial Tone extension sets programmable extension 1 enable Di
11. One ring is equivalent to five seconds You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA General Programming 115 2 3 Timer Programming 214 D ISA Prolong Time Description Sets the maximum allowable prolonged time for an outside to outside line call via the Direct Inward System Access DISA feature An outside to outside line call is initially limited by the Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time Programme 206 However the DISA caller can prolong the call after hearing the warning tones by pressing any key except the X key The DISA prolong time sets the duration of these extended periods Selection Time minutes 0 through 7 O no prolonging Default 3 min Programming 1 Enter 214 Display DISA Prolng Time 2 Press NEXT Display example 3 Enter the time Time 3 min To change the current entry enter the new time Press STORE Press END Un A Conditions e Do not confuse this parameter with the Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time Programme 206 parameter Programme 206 is used to set the duration time allowed for an outside to outside line call e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA 116 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 215 Outgoing Message Time Description Sets the maximum allowable recording time for Outgoi
12. 2 2 System Programming 114 VM Command DTMF Set Description Sets the DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency command signals transmitted to your Voice Processing System VPS There are four commands available Leave Message Get Message Automated Attendant Service Voice Mail Service These commands are used in the following ways A If your VPS is used for Voice Mail VM Service 1 Call Forwarding Intercept Routing toVoice Mail If a call is forwarded to the VPS your system will send a mailbox number to the VM port This allows the caller to leave a message without knowing the mailbox number Required entries selections LV MSG Leave Message This command is transmitted to a VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port AA SVC Automated Attendant Service If AA Service is effective in programme 990 Area 06 bits 6 and 7 the AA SVC command is sentto a VM port if an incoming outside call is answered by the VM port Other programming required programme addresses 106 602 609 665 990 Area 06 bits 6 and 7 990 Area 02 bit 8 2 Hearing the message at the extension If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button indicator of the dialled telephone the telephone user can hear the message by pressing the MESSAGE button Required entries selections GETMSG Get Message This command is transmitted to a VM port when the message receiver presses the MESS
13. 3 5 Reserved Selects the result when an outside call is routed by Call Forwarding to a voice mail port which is in the AA service mode For both Inband and DPT Integration disable AA service mode enable The mode will change to the VM service mode and a Follow On ID is sent When the voice mail port is in the VM service mode this programme will not be affected e disable enable m Voice Mail Integration Selects the result when an outside call is routed to a voice mail port by IRNA For both Inband and DPT Integration When the voice mail port is in the VM service mode enable VM service mode disable The mode will change to the AA service mode Only when Inband When the voice mail port is in the AA service mode enable The mode will change to the VM service mode and a Follow On ID is sent disable AA service mode 0 enable 1 disable Voice Mail Integration General Programming 2 9 2 9 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 06 8 Enables or disables sending outside line 0 enable 1 E amp M TIE Line access number 9 to a TIE line When 1 disable Service you dial outside line access number 9 and the outside line is busy the system can automatically send outside line access number 9 to a TIE line so that you can access the outside line through ano
14. 322 3 29 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 eene 132 33 OJARS Modify Removed Digit essent entere enne nente enne 134 33 1 ARS Modify Added Number eese eterne nere 135 2 5 Outside Line Programming e eere eee ee ee eee seen esee tn estt ta eee toa see tasse ease ete sa ae eea 136 40 OJ Outside Line Connection Assignment essere enne 136 40 1 Outside Line Group Assignment sess 138 40 2 Dial Mode Selection manna eene enne ene 140 40 3 Pulse Speed Selection ssssseeseeeeseeeeeeeee E nnne enne enene enne nennen 142 40 cd DEME Time erteilt eite etes eet eei ette ei E e teen e vet ete ee eaa 144 407 4 08 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night eeeeeeeernen eene 146 409 4 10 Intercept Extension Day Night eene 148 41 T Host PBX Access C odes inen eri ie Masa el ed es eee 150 4 1 72 Pause Dez i cete ee ees Ra Ond ETE 152 Table of Contents 5 413 CLAS EPI s 2r Rd Ner Pur enne Da See OR FC ce a ake 153 414 Disconnect Times uS nnne vie ete On IE 155 417 Outside Line Name Assignment esses enne nnne nenne 156 423 Pay Tone Assignment ient i RU ert ee ie eed 158 HAt bine Hunting Sequence 2 e rettet tete ite eene Foe e t eee et 160 2 6 COS Progranmillb eee eee eoero rene eec eoo ene tna oa en eoa epe a erae ipeo ere prece
15. 6 In a Meeting 7 through 9 Blank not stored Programming 1 Enter 008 Display Message Asn 2 Press NEXT Display MSG NO 3 Enter a message number To enter message number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example MSG1 Will Return 4 Enter the message For entering characters see Section 1 4Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new message 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another message press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired message numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END General Programming 45 2 1 Manager Programming Conditions Messages 1 through 6 are programmed at the factory but can be changed e You can enter a maximum of seven 96 characters per message which can be programmed at each user s extension The extension user can enter 0 through 9 X and for the characters If the user enters digits less than the number of 96 characters it is recommended to fill the remaining 46 characters with or X e fthere are 4 digit extension numbers available in your system add one 46 to Message 3 e To display parts of the message which have scrolled off the display press m gt or lt Features Guide References Absent Message Capability 46 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 009 Emergency Dial Number Set Description Assigns emergency call
16. 8 00 AM Time B 5 00 PM Time C 9 00 PM Time D Disable Programming 1 Enter 313 Display ARS Time 2 Press NEXT to programme Time A Display example Time A 8 00 AM To programme another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 3 Enter the hour To set no schedule Disable press SELECT and go to step 6 If Disable is selected pressing SELECT shows the previous stored hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new hour Press Bi elect AM PM Press SELECT for AM or PM Press STORE To programme another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed NHN 0 RR e Repeat steps 3 through 7 9 Press END Conditions The times must be programmed in sequence from Time A to Time D Enter a starting time for each time schedule Select Disable for idle schedules e You cannot leave an entry empty 128 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS General Programming 129 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 314 321 A RS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 Description By entering numbers into each leading digit plan programmes below you are starting the process to determine which outside line group will be used to route the call Programme 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 3
17. Features Guide References None DECT Programming 375 5 3 Extension Programming 673 C LIP COLP Number Assignment for PS Description Assigns a CLIP COLP number to each Portable Station Selection PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all PS registration numbers e CLIP COLP number 16 digits max Default All PSs Not stored Programming 1 Enter 673 Display PS CLIP COLP 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Not stored 4 Enter CLIP COLP numbe To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration numbe 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Each CLIP COLP number can be a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e To assign all PSs to one selection press the Xey in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS 01 Features Guide References Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 376 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP DECT Programming 377 5 3 Extension Programming 676 P S Incoming Call Display Description Allows
18. 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 83 Two Way Record 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 84 Two Way Transfer 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number Loop CO None Group CO 1 through 8 Outside line group number Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP200 Default All PSs CO 01 Loop CO CO 02 and CO 03 Not stored 342 DECT Programming 5 1 Manager Programming Programming 1 Enter 020 Display PS Flexible Key 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display PT PGM Mode 4 Press the CO button to be changed The display shows the button pre assignment Display example CO 01 5 Enter the button code plus parameter if required To change the parameter press CLEAR and enter the new parameter 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another CO button for the same PS repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another PS press SELECT and repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END Cancelling 1 Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above 2 Enter 2 3 Press STORE 4 Press END Conditions None Features Guide Reference
19. 350 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming e If disabled Display Rejected The Cell Station CS may not be connected or not working After connecting the CS or resetting the PBX wait for at least one minute and try again from the beginning With a PS 6 Slide the Power switch ON 7 Press the Function button Display KEY 8 Press the Book button twice Display PROGRAMMING 9 Press the Auto OK button 10 Press the Book button repeatedly until the display below appears Display REGISTRATION 11 Press the Auto OK button Display example DECT SYS NO 1234 12 Enter the DECT system numbe Display example DECT SYS NO 1 13 Press the Auto OK button Display example ENTER PASSWORD 14 Enter the PS password Display example ENTER PASSWORD cete You will hear a confirmation tone 15 Press the Auto OK button Display DECT SYS LOCK DISABLE 16 Press the Book button to select DISABLE or ENABLE for the System Lock Display DECT SYS LOCK DISABLE DECT Programming 351 5 3 Extension Programming 17 Press the Auto OK button Display example if disabled UNLOCKED if enabled ENTER PASSWORD 18 If you select ENABLE in step 16 enter a System Lock password Display ENTER PASSWORD meee 19 Press the Auto OK button Display REENTER PASSWORD 20 Enter the System Lock password again Display REENTER PASSWORD mK 21 Press the Auto OK button Disp
20. 400 O utside Line Connection Assignment Description Used to identify the outside lines which are connected to the system s This prevents users from originating a call to a line which is not connected Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 54 X all outside lines Connect No Connect Default All outside lines Connect If KX TD290 is connected All outside lines in the Slave System No Connect Programming 1 Enter 400 Display CO Connection 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Connect 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXTor PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available 136 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming Outside lines 25 through 54 become available when the KX TD290 expansion unit is installed in the KX TD1232 To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Features Guide References Outside Line
21. 45 Call waiting OHCA Whisper OHCA 731 46 Executive busy override deny 733 47 Pickup dialling 74 48 Absent message 750 49 Timed reminder 76 50 Electronic station lockout TI 51 Night service mode 78 52 Parallel telephone mode 39 53 Background music external 35 54 Reserved 55 62 Emergency call 1 through 8 None 63 Timed reminder remote 7 64 Call log incoming 56 65 Call log lock incoming 57 66 Check out ready 736 67 TIE line access number None 68 83 Other PBX Extension 01 through 16 None 84 LCS password set cancel 799 85 Log in log out 45 86 SXDP 48 87 CLIP COLP 711 88 Reserved 89 MCID 731 DECT Programming 345 5 2 System Programming Selection Selection number 01 through 89 See Feature Number List for the corresponding features Feature number 1 or 2 digits for selection numbers 01 through 16 68 through 83 1 through 3 digits for selection numbers 17 through 67 84 through 89 Default See Feature Number List Programming 1 Enter 100 Display FLX Numbering 2 Press NEXT Display Select NO 3 Enter a selection number To enter selection number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 EXT BL 1 4 Enter the feature number To delete the feature number press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another selection
22. 7 Repeat steps 4 and 6 8 Press END Conditions The following jacks are not available for this assignment Jack 01 The jack for the manager extension Jacks assigned to voice mail ports 96 General Programming 2 2 System Programming Jacks assigned to consoles and paired telephones Jacks already assigned to the message waiting adaptor unit If the unit is connected to a port which is not assigned as the data port a clicking sound may be heard from the unit Please make sure that the unit is connected to the assigned port When the data port is assigned properly and the unit is connected to the assigned port the unit power indicator lights red If the assignment and connection are wrong the power indicator will flash e For the KX TD1232 unit numbers 1 through 3 are for the Master System and 4 through 6 are for the Slave System Jack numbers 02 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave System e After this assignment the message waiting ring tone will not be sent to single line telephone users Features Guide References Message Waiting General Programming 97 2 2 System Programming 155 M essage Waiting Lamp Assignment Description Assigns the message waiting light pattern Selection Message waiting light pattern number 01 through 12 Default 1 Programming 1 Enter 155 Display MW LAMP 2 Press NEXT Display MW LAMP NO 1 3 Enter a me
23. 81 Extension Number Set 8 Voice Mail 3 Floating Number e If Xr ft is included in a feature number dial pulse telephone users cannot access the feature e Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid Valid entry examples 30 and 31 210 and 211 Invalid entry examples 5 and 5 30 and 301 e If you delete a feature number the feature cannot be used by dialling operation e You can remove all the feature numbers except selections 01 through 16 Toclear an extension block 01 through 16 itis required to change the corresponding numbers assigned in programmes 003 Ex Number Set 813 F Flexible Numbering tension Number Set 012 IS DN Extension Number Set 118 Vace Mail Extension Number Set 130 Ph loating Number Assignment and 671 PS antom Extension Extension Number Set 240 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Description Assigns the type of expansion units to be used in the system This allows the system to identify the unit in each expansion unit location Selection KX TD816 e Areas 1 2 C 4 CO S1 280 S2 6 S0 EM 4 E amp M E EXT A 16 SLT D No Use KX TD1232 Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 C 4 CO S1 2 S0 S2 6 S0 S3 1 PRI EM 4 E amp M E1 8 EXT1 E2 8 EXT2 A1 16 SLTI A2 16 SLT2 D No Use Master system only S3 E1 and E2 for the KX TD144 or KX TD146 Default KX TD816 C E KX
24. 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 199 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 199 291 through 294 296 through 299 Programme 653 PS Extension Name Set is used to name the PSs Itis possible to modify the extension number in this programme If the PS extension number was modified re register the PS to the system in programme 6 50 PS Registration in order to use the extension number Features Guide References Digital Wireless Connection 374 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 672 PS Password Set Description Assigns a registration password which is used for registration programme 650 PS Registration to each PS Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 PS password 4 digits Default All PSs 1234 Programming 1 Enter 672 Display PS Password SET 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 1234 4 Enter the PS password Display example PS01 5678 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e f you modify the PS password re register the PS to the system in order to use the password
25. Automatic Other ports Fix 0 KX TD1232 AII ports Fix 0 429 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber All ports Disable Number 430 ISDN Extension ProgressTone All ports Disable 447 MSN Assignment All ports All locations Not stored 448 449 E xtension Ringing Assignment All ports All locations Disable Day Night Day Night for ISDN 450 PRI Configuration B channel number 0 line CRC4 Enable Default Values 403 Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension Programme Default 451 PRI Reference CO All outside lines PRI line CO 13 452 453 I SDN Ring Service Assignment All ports Disable Day Night Day Night 613 ISDN Class of Service All ports Primary Secondary COS 1 COS 1 614 615 O utgoing Permitted Outside Line All ports All outside lines Enabl Day Night ISDN Extension 617 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for All jacks Not stored Extension 618 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for All ports Not stored 990 System Additional Information See Default shown in the explanation table 4 E amp M Programming Programme Default 100 Flexible Numbering See Feature Number List 109 Expansion Unit Type KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 128 PBX Code Not stored 129 E amp M Signal Assignment C
26. Enter 012 Display ISDN EXT NO Press NEXT Display Port NO Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display 01 Not Stored Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions Each extension number can be two or three digits consisting of 0 through 9 The xnd keys cannot be used A multiple subscribers number MSN is determined regarding of this assignment The MSN consists of the assigned extension number and an additional digit 0 through 9 Example If an ISDN extension number is assigned as 3 30 through 39 are effective as MSN s The extension user can call any terminal equipment on the ISDN SO bus with MSN individually Pressing 30 calls all extensions on the ISD SO bus simultaneously ISDN Programming 231 3 1 Manager Programming Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available An extension number is invalid if the first or second digit does not match with the setting in programme 100 Flexible Numbering 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers areinvalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 a
27. This timer applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed Selection Time seconds 5 through 30 Default 10s Programming 1 Enter 208 Display Inter Digit Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time Press STORE Press END Un A Conditions This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Toll Restriction 110 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times Description Sets the number of times Automatic Redial is tried Automatic redialling of the last dialled or saved number is done up to the specified number of times Selection Number of times 1 through 30 Default 10 times Programming 1 Enter 209 Display Redial Times 2 Press NEXT Display example Attempt 10 3 Enter the number of times To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of times 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Programme 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time is used to set the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Redial General Programming 111 2 3 Timer Programming 210 JAutomatic Redial Interval Time Description Sets the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts Sele
28. To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers 01 through 16 1st through 16th extension blocks 1 Enter 100 2 Press NEXT 3 Enter 00 Display All Feature CLR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Required digits and valid entries for the feature numbers are as follows General Programming 55 2 2 System Programming Feature number type Required digits Valid entry Extension blocks other TE PBX extensions 1 or 2 digits 0 through 9 TIE line access number 1 through 3 digits 0 through 9 Other feature numbers through 3 digits 0 through 9 x tis possible to assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective extension blocks Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programmes 00 3 Extension Number Set 0 Extension Number Set 130 Assignment and 671 PS 12 ISDN Extension Number Set 11 Phantom Extension Number Set 81 8 Voice Mail 3 Floating Number Extension Number Set e If Xr ft is included in a feature number dial pulse telephone users cannot access the feature e Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid Valid entry examples 30 and 31 210 and 211 Invalid entry examples 5 and 5 30 and 301 e If you delete a feature number the feature cannot be used by dialling operation e You can remove all the feature numbers except selections 01 through 16 Toclear an extension block 01 through
29. enter the new number 5 Press a gt 6 Enter a secondary COS number To change the current entry enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END ISDN Programming 277 3 4 Extension Programming Conditions Forthe KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services Each ISDN extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming for programmes 5XX and 991 bit 5 To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 Features Guide References Class of Service COS 278 ISDN Programming 3 4 Extension Programming 614 615 O utgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension Description Determines which outside lines can be accessed by an ISDN extension in both the day and night modes The extension users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned outside lines Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Enabl enable Disab disable Def
30. external 32 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 33 27 Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup outside line 4 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve outside line 53 34 Last number redial 35 Call park Call park retrieve 52 36 Account code entry 49 37 Door opener 55 298 E amp M Programming 4 1 System Programming Feature Number List Number Feature Default 38 External feature access 6 39 Station feature clear 790 40 Message waiting 70 41 Outgoing message 36 42 Call forwarding Do not disturb 710 43 Call pickup deny 720 44 Data line security 730 45 Call waiting OHCA Whisper OHCA 731 46 Executive busy override deny 733 47 Pickup dialling 74 48 Absent message 750 49 Timed reminder 76 50 Electronic station lockout TI 51 Night service mode 78 52 Parallel telephone mode 39 53 Background music external 35 54 Reserved 55 62 Emergency call 1 through 8 None 63 Timed reminder remote 7 64 Call log incoming 56 65 Call log lock incoming 57 66 Check out ready 736 67 TIE line access number None 68 83 Other PBX Extension 01 through 16 None 84 LCS password set cancel 799 85 Log in log out 45 86 SXDP 48 87 CLIP COLP 711 88 Reserved 89 MCID 731 E amp M Programming 2
31. 0 Dial Type blocking mode in programme 1 67 Selection 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing Select an appropriate ratio depending on the standard in your country 8 Determines whether an extension 0 extension 0 Voice Mail mailbox number is substituted by the number Integration extension number or itis programmable 1 free free If a call is forwarded or rerouted to the VPS this system automatically transmits the mailbox number to the VPS to specify the user s mailbox To make it programmable select 1 free then assign the number in programme 609 Voice Mail Access Codes and 665 PSVoice Mail Access Codes 9 Determines the initial display of a 0 names 0 Call Directory digital display proprietary telephone 1 numbers except for KX T7230 in Station Speed Dialling 10 Reserved 12 11 Selects inter digit pause for pulse 00 630 ms 01 None dialling 01 830 ms 10 1030 ms 13 Selects intercom dial tone frequency 0 normal 0 None 1 distinctive 14 Reserved 15 Sets the maximum time for detecting a 0 1000 ms 0 None hooking signal from a single line 1 136 ms telephone 16 Reserved 386 DECT Programming 5 4 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 03 1 16 These bits are provided to assign PAD 0 0dB 0 None 04 1 8
32. 1 2 1 first part 2 second part Mailbox number 16 digits max Default All jacks Not stored Programming 1 Enter 609 Display Mailbox ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a mailbox number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable General Programming 185 2 7 Extension Programming e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for KX TD1232 for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant ports e Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE e To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the display press wie 4 Features Guide R
33. 1 N 1 DDI of incoming DDI numbers or MSN 1 operator MSN Ringing numbers when 0 is assigned in Service programmes 151 152 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night and 448 449 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 9 Assigns whether a new page is ejected 0 disable 0 Hotel Application or not when the Hotel Application is 1 enable printed out by SMDR 10 When Timed Reminder starts and is not 0 disable 1 Timed Reminder answered this programme enables or 1 enable disables the SMDR printout for Timed Reminder 11 Enables or disables to send a COLP 0 enable 1 COLP number 1 disable CLIR COLR 12 16 Reserved 290 ISDN Programming 3 5 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 06 Sets the time after terminating the OGM 0 0s 58 m DISA OGM Determines whether the account code is printed out or not shown in dots by the SMDR shown in dots shown a SMDR 3 5 Reserved Selects the result when an outside call is routed by Call Forwarding to a voice mail port which is in the AA service mode For both Inband and DPT Integration disable AA service mode enable The mode will change to the VM service mode and a Follow On ID is sent When the voice mail port is in the VM service mode this programme will not be affected e
34. 13 through 24 will become No Connect and the assigned B channel numbers of outside lines starting from outside line 25 will become Connect automatically in programme 400 Outside Line Connection Assignment For example if the B channel number is assigned as 3 outside lines 25 through 27 will become Connect Features Guide References None 242 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 451 PRI Reference CO Description Assigns which outside line number system data each PRI line uses except for the following programmes e 40 1 Outside Line Group Assignment 41 7 Outside Line Name Assignment e 41 8 ISDN Line Number Assignment After assigning this programme the following programme data will become available for PRI outside lines 25 through 54 e 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night e 41 9 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment e 42 1 ISDN DDI MSN Removed Digit Added Number Assignment 42 3 Pay Tone Assignment e 452 453 ISDN Ring Service Assignment Day Night e 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night e 605 606 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night e 614 615 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension 661 662 PS Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night This programme is only available for the KX TD1232 with the Primary Rate Interface ISDN Expansion Unit KX TD290 Selecti
35. 138 Outside Line Name Assignment 156 Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time 108 116 Outside to TIE Transfer 320 Overlay 12 13 P PAD Switch Control 217 289 334 387 Pager 197 199 Pause 152 PAUSE button 12 Pause Time 152 Pay Tone Assignment 158 PBX Code 304 Phantom Extension 93 Phantom Extension button 38 228 Phantom Extension Number Set 93 Pickup Dial Waiting Time 106 PREV PREVIOUS button 12 PRI Configuration 272 PRI Reference CO 273 PROGRAM button 12 Programming Example 23 Programming Instructions 10 Programming Methods 15 Progress Tone 266 PS Budget Management 358 PS Charge Verification Assignment 360 411 Index PS Class of Service 361 PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night 369 PS Extension Group Assignment 363 PS Extension Name Set 356 PS Extension Number Set 373 PS Flexible CO Button Assignment 342 PS Incoming Call Display 221 293 338 378 391 PS Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night 367 PS Password Set 375 PS Radio System ID Reference 381 PS Registration 350 PS Termination 354 PS Voice Mail Access Codes 216 288 333 371 386 Pulse break ratio 216 288 333 386 Pulse dialling signals 217 289 334 387 Pulse feedback 217 289 334 387 Pulse mode 140 142 Pulse Speed Selection 142 Q Quick Dialling 52 61 Quick Dialling Number 61 Quick Dialling Number Set 52 R Radio Information Data Clear 382 Ri
36. 16 itis required to change the corresponding numbers assigned in programmes 003 Ex Number Set 118 Vace Mail Extension Number Set 130 Ph antom Extension Number Set 813 F Features Guide References Flexible Numbering loating Number Assignment and 671 PS tension Number Set 012 IS DN Extension 56 General Programming Extension Number Set 2 2 System Programming 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Description This programme is used to determine if night mode is set automatically or manually Selection Manual Auto automatic Default Manual Programming 1 Enter 101 Display Day Night Mode 2 Press NEXT Display example D N Mode Manual 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 5 Press END A Conditions e If automatic switching is assigned day night mode is switched at the time programmed in 10 2 Day Night Service Starting Time The operator can switch the day night mode at any time Features Guide References Night Service General Programming 57 2 2 System Programming 102 D ay Night Service Starting Time Description Sets the starting time on a day of the week basis when automatic day night switching is programmed in programme 101 D ay Night Service Switching Mode Selection Dayofthe week selection number 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Fr
37. 16 digits max Default All ports All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 447 Display MSN Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 01 Not Stored Location number Port number 4 Enter a MSN To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV Repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another port press SELECT and the desired port number o0 10 Un Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions Each MSN can be 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 268 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming FortheKX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available This programme becomes available when MSN is selected in programme 452 453 I SDN Ring Service Assignment Day Night Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN Ringing Service ISDN Programming 269 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 448 449 E xtension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN Description Determines which extension receives a call on a MSN basis of the ISDN port in both the day and night modes Selection Port number KX TD81
38. 1T 2T 3T AT Blank All time tables Not stored Programming 1 oo NAA Enter 127 Display UCD Time Table Press NEXT Display Table NO Enter a Time Table numbe To enter Time Table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display exampl e gt Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Display exampl Press um Repeat steps 4 and 5 Press STORE Press END e 1 S4 gt gt gt General Programming 91 2 2 System Programming Conditions Sx can be assigned in a space other than in the first only when another Sx is assigned in the first space e An assignment after TR RT or Blank is not available Features Guide References Uniform Call Distribution UCD 92 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Description Assigns the phantom extension numbers Each number will be assigned to a flexible CO or DSS Direct Station Selection button and used as a Phantom Extension button Selection Location number 001 through 128 Phantom extension number 2 through 4 digits Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 130 Display Phantom NO 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 3 Enter a location numbe To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 En
39. 2 Press NEXT Display Table NO 3 Enter a TIE table number To enter TIE table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Wink 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another TIE table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired TIE table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all TIE tables to one selection press the Xey in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for TIE table number 1 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 313 4 4 TIE Line Programming 433 T IE Outgoing Assignment Description Assings a TIE outgoing method immediate or wink to each TIE table according to your central office service Immediate Outgoing TIE numbers can be transmitted right after seizing the outside line Wink Outgoing TIE numbers can be transmitted after receiving the wink signal from the central office after seizing the outside line Selection TIE table number 1 through 4 x all TIE tables Immediate Wink Default All TIE tables Wink Programming 1 Enter 433 Display TIE Signal Out 2 Press NEXT Display Table NO 3 Enter a TIE table number To enter TIE table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Wink 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To pr
40. 322 329 A RS Routing Plans 1 through 8 Description Assigns the outside line group and modification plan to be used for each route plan and time schedule Programme 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 Plan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Selection Time schedule A B C D Outside line group number 1 through 8 Modification table number 1 through 8 Default All time schedules Not stored Programming 1 Enter a programme address 322 through 329 Display example ARS Route PL 1 2 Press NEXT to programme time schedule A To programme another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed Display example A G M GM GM 3 Enter an outside line group number To delete the current entry press CLEA To change the current entry enter the new number 4 Press Winter the paired modification table number 5 Enter a modification table numbe To delete the current entry press CLEA To change the current entry enter the new modification table number 6 Press Winter the next priority outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to enter other outside line group numbers and modification table numbers 8 Press STORE 9 To programme another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 132 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 11 Pre
41. 4 through 10 digits COS number 1 through 8 Default All DISA TIE user code numbers DISA TIE user code Blank COS number 8 Programming 1 Enter 811 Display User Code 2 Press NEXT Display User Code NO 3 Enter a DISA TIE user code number To enter user code number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Cis 4 Enter a DISA TIE user code To delete the carrent entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new code 5 Press gt rogramme COS 6 Enter a COS number To change the current entry enter the new COS number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another user code press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DISA TIE user code number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END 328 E amp M Programming 4 5 Resource Programming Conditions This setting is required if Trunk Outside line Security mode is selected in programmes 44 OJ TIE Security Type and 809 DISA Security Type Each code should be unique and composed of four through ten numerical digits 0 through 9 e You cannot leave an entry empty Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 329 4 6 Optional Programming 4 6 Optional Programming 990 S ystem Additional Information Description Allows the following programming items to be changed if required Each bit in each Area represents a programming
42. 4 through 8 10 Press END General Programming 43 2 1 Manager Programming Conditions Thejack number for the console and that for the paired extension must be entered together Multiple consoles cannot be assigned to the same console jack Multiple consoles can be paired with the same proprietary telephone jack Aconsole jack cannot be assigned the jack 01 and the jack number of manager set in programme 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment e fall incoming outside calls are set to ring at the operator extension telephone in programme 407 4 O8 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night assigning a console to the operator extension makes the operator s job much easier e Ifa single line telephone is assigned as the pair extension the paired console will not function Ifaconsole assigned jack is programmed for eXtra Device Port XDP a single line telephone can be connected to the jack in parallel with the console Features Guide References Console 44 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 008 Absent Messages Description Used to programme the absent messages An absent message if set by the extension user is displayed on the calling extension s telephone to show the reason for the user s absence Selection Message number 1 through 9 Message 16 characters max Default 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext 969696 4 Back at 5 Out Until 2690 0696
43. 7 Eirst Digit Time eeu op tete REO eO ER RE EE EXER EROR 109 20 8 Inter Direit Times een dente ertet e ete PR Cp REP etre ees 110 20 9 Automatic Redial Repeat Times essere enne nnne 111 21 O Automatic Redial Interval Time essere 112 21 Dal Start Hme iter hte heces teret PEDRO 113 21 2 Call Duration Count Start Time e R AA eene ener nns 114 21 3 DISA Delayed Answer Time sninen eiiie E a nnne entente 115 BPI ADISA Prolong Eime 5 eet ete eere rete e Eee E eR 116 21 5 Outgoimg Message Tim ien ee e teens 117 21 6 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time eene 118 21 7 Timed Reminder Alarm Repeat Times essere 119 21 8 Timed Reminder Alarm Interval Time eese nennen 120 22 T DISA AA Wait Title ro e tete der etre Roast eei eo eoi Mese icto 121 2 4 TRS ARS Prosrammiing eoc etre sens ssusnsseassnssconendsoanssnseessenssetsecsessensconeessecseseses 122 30 OJTRS Override for System Speed Dialling eee 122 301 3 O5 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 sse 123 306 3 10 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 sees 125 31 2TARS Md n Ln ct ett eme tese erae re Er Pee hr rA ee eid ro ee eoe aT etudes 127 BE JARS TIE eno IND ne ita Sette tet 128 314 3 21 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 esses 130
44. 9 Optional Programming e eie eo roce eene r ore re eee P re neo ne eL epe reus Uere toe ee sao U Ine Seen saa UU 213 990 System Additional Information essere enne ennt 213 991 COS Additional Information eese nnne ene 224 3 ISDN Prtoeranimine e eeeiceeue ter ie Crue boca cta teer cob resin eese ee 227 3 1 Manager Programming e eece eni eee renonce eene serre irre inno erra soe nh eo rera urea i aiaia 228 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment sess enne enne 38 Table of Contents 01 2 ISDN Extension Number Set sese ene 231 OT 3UISDN Extension Name Set meiimen riiin ee eher re rere er eee eee EE 233 0 4 Budget Management on ISDN Port eeeeeeeeeeenennnenne ener 235 3 2 System Programming eoe eee et esp eee re e eet e erase etn p ee oae ost e en deg serep sses euro bee Paene eoe erp 237 10 O Bl xible Numberifig 5 eee re th e eerte eee rto etr e tere tere t lied 53 10 9 Expansion Unit Type ton ER E Ee RR ert erp 69 11 2 ISDN Network Type Assignment esee nen rennen 243 15 ODDE Translation Table ertet tete ret an deS aA 244 151 1 52 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night sese 246 33 ISDN Line Programming siecccciscescccscicsccdenisoasssscasvececenstsestsennevevessecstescsoescesssessensgusessete 248 41 8 ISDN Line Number Assignment cc ceecccecccc
45. Connection Assignment General Programming 137 2 5 Outside Line Programming 401 O utside Line Group Assignment Description Each outside line must be assigned to an outside line group This programme defines the outside line group assignment for each outside line For example if there are multiple telephone service companies available the outside lines can be grouped by company Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 54 X all outside lines Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 Default COO01 TRG 1 CO02 TRG 2 CO03 TRG 3 CO04 TRG 4 CO05 TRG 5 CO06 TRG 6 CO07 TRG 7 CO08 TRG 8 for KX TD816 CO08 through CO54 TRG 8 for KX TD1232 Programming 1 Enter 401 Display Trunk Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 TRG1 4 Enter the outside line group numbe To change the current entry enter the new outside line group number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 138 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 throug
46. Default CCITT Programming 1 Enter 814 Display MODEM Standard 2 Press NEXT Display example MODEM CCITT 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 5 Press END A Conditions Select the standard used by your modem Features Guide References System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer General Programming 209 2 8 Resource Programming 815 S MDR Output Mode Description Assigns the SMDR Output Mode There are two standards available Regular and Charge Selection Regular Charge Default Regular Programming 1 Enter 815 Display SMDR Output Mode 2 Press NEXT Display example SMDR Regular 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 5 Press END A Conditions Select the Output Mode used by your SMDR e Ifyou assign for Charge you can select the display in Meter in Charge through programme 12 O Charge Display Selection Features Guide References Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 210 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 817 KX TD197 Baud Rate Set Description Assigns the KX TD197 standard There are two standards available BELL andCCITT V 34 Selection BELL V 34 9600 V 34 14400 V 34 19200 V34 28800 V 34 33600 Default V 34 33600 Programming 1 Enter 817 Display TD197 Type 2 Press NEXT Display example Mast V 34 33600
47. H ost PBX Access Codes Description Assigns Host PBX access codes If the system is installed behind a host PBX an access code is required to make an outside call Up to four codes can be stored for an outside line group assigned to the line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X Xall outside line groups Access code 1 or 2 digits four different entries max Default All outside line groups Not stored Programming 1 Enter 411 Display TRG Host PBX NO 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 4 Enter an access code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new access code Display example TRG1 01 5 To enter more access codes for the same outside line group press W enter the access codes until all the required entries are completed Display example TRG1 01 08 10 22 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group numbe 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END Conditions This programme is only required if a host PBX line is connected to the system Programme 40 1 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign the line to an outside line group 150 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming
48. ISDN ISDN Programming 259 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 427 I SDN Data Link Mode Description Assigns the data link mode on an ISDN port basis Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports Permanent Call Default KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Call Other ports Permanent KX TD1232 All ports Permanent Programming 1 Enter 427 Display Data Link Mode 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Permanent 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Forthe KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available Toassign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 e After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective 260 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 261 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 428 I SDN TEI Mode Description Assigns the Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI mode on an
49. Operator 1 Jack 01 Operator 2 and Manager Not stored 007 Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment All consoles Not stored 008 Absent Messages 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Hom 3 At Ext 9696 4 Back at 5 Out Until 9696 9696 6 In a Meeting 7 through 9 Blank not stored 009 Emergency Dial Number Set All locations Not stored 010 Budget Management All jacks 0 011 Charge Margin Rate 096 015 Quick Dialling Number Set All location numbers Not stored 396 Default Values Programme Default 100 Flexible Numbering See Feature Number List 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Manual 102 Day Night Service Starting Time Every day of the week Day 9 00 AM Night 5 00 PM 103 Automatic Access Outside Line Group 12345678 Assignment 104 Flexible Quick Dialling Number Set All locations Not stored 105 Account Codes All locations Not stored 106 Station Hunting Type All extension groups Disable 107 System Password 1234 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Enable 109 Expansion Unit Type KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 113 VM Status DTMF Set RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 114 VM Command
50. Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter the outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To disable Intercept Routing press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Toassign all outside line groups to one selection press the Xey in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 e Programme 401 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign each outside line to an outside line group e Assignable extension numbers are programmed in the following programmes Extension numbers 0 03 Extension Number Set ISDN extension numbers 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 148 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming Voice Mail extension numbers 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Phantom extension numbers 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Floating numbers of External Pagers DISA messages and extension groups only 81 3 Floating Number Assignment PS extension number 6 7 1 PS Extension Number Set Features Guide References Intercept Routing General Programming 149 2 5 Outside Line Programming 411
51. SHIFT Example KX T7230 Display Buttons Press SHIFT to alternate SKP CLR NEXT lt gri e l Soft 1 Type 3 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Press SHIFT to alternate SKP PREV Soft Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT gt OEL NEXT D Press SHIFT to alternate lt SEL PREV Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Type 4 A B C IR Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Type 5 Press SHIFT to alternate Softl Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT DM b C Softl Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT SKP SEL NEXT I Soft Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT SKP CLR PREV Soft3 SHIFT Soft Soft 2 Programming Instructions 11 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones You can use either the soft buttons or the overlay buttons For overlay buttons refer to Using the Overlay below Throughout programming you will see instructions such as Press PREV If you use soft buttons this means press SHIFT release SHIFT and then press Soft 3 The PREV function is performed Note If you use soft buttons and if programming instructions tell you to press the following buttons you may press soft buttons shown below Instructions Soft button SELECT SEL SEL or SEL CLEAR CLR Using the
52. Selection Default Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines 10 pps 20 pps All outside lines 10 pps Programming 1 Enter 403 Display Pulse Speed Press NEXT Display CO Line NO Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 10pps Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another outside line press NEXTor PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 The pulse speed required is determined by the outside line or PBX line 142 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming e Programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 bit 7 and bits 12 and 11 are used to select a pulse break ratio and inter digit pause if needed Features Guide References Dial Type Selection General Programming 143 2 5 Outside Line Programming 404 D TMF Time Description An outside line set to DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency mode in prog
53. Selects inter digit pause for pulse 00 630 ms 01 None dialling 01 830 ms 10 1030 ms 13 Selects intercom dial tone frequency 0 normal 0 None 1 distinctive 14 Reserved 15 Sets the maximum time for detecting a 0 1000 ms 0 None hooking signal from a single line 1 136 ms telephone 16 Reserved 216 General Programming 2 9 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 03 1 16 These bits are provided to assign PAD 0 0dB 0 None 04 1 8 Switch Control volume control of 1 3 dB received calls on an outside line This can be assigned for each outside line The bits 1 through 16 in Area 03 correspond to outside lines 1 through 16 and the bits 1 through 8 in Area 04 correspond to outside lines 17 through 24 The outside lines 9 through 24 are only available for KX TD1232 9 Prevents or allows a call originated by 0 prevent 1 Voice Mail an AA port of VPS to another AA port 1 allow Integration 10 Prevents or allows sending pulse 0 prevent 1 None dialling signals during an outside call 1 allow 11 12 Reserved 13 Enables or disables the pulse feedback 0 disable 1 None sound when a dialled number is sent to 1 enable an outside line 14 16 Reserved General Programming 217 2 9 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Defau
54. Switch Control volume control of 1 3 dB received calls on an outside line This can be assigned for each outside line The bits 1 through 16 in Area 03 correspond to outside lines 1 through 16 and the bits 1 through 8 in Area 04 correspond to outside lines 17 through 24 The outside lines 9 through 24 are only available for KX TD1232 9 Prevents or allows a call originated by 0 prevent 1 Voice Mail an AA port of VPS to another AA port 1 allow Integration 10 Prevents or allows sending pulse 0 prevent 1 None dialling signals during an outside call 1 allow 11 12 Reserved 13 Enables or disables the pulse feedback 0 disable 1 None sound when a dialled number is sent to 1 enable an outside line 14 16 Reserved DECT Programming 387 5 4 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 05 1 6 Reserved 7 In the day mode selects the destination 0 DIL 1 N 1 DDI of incoming DDI numbers or MSN 1 operator MSN Ringing numbers when 0 is assigned in Service programmes 151 152 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night and 448 449 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 8 Inthenight mode selects the destination 0 DIL 1 N 1 DDI of incoming DDI numbers or MSN 1 operator MSN Ringing numbers when 0 is assigned in Service programmes 151 152 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night and 448 449 Extensi
55. TRG1 96 msec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions You may disable EFA if not required The Flash feature will be in effect in place of EFA Programme 414 Disconnect Time is used to select the time required for the Flash feature e The flash time required is determined by the central office or the host PBX lines Toassign all outside line groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 General Programming 153 2 5 Outside Line Programming e Programme 401 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign each outside line to an outside line group Features Guide References External Feature Access Flash 154 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 414 Disconnect Time Description Determines the amount of time between successive accesses to the same outside line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X Xll outside line groups Time seconds 1 5 4 0 Default All outside line groups 1 5 s Programming 1 Enter 414 Display TRG Discnct Time 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group number To programme outside line
56. an TIE call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF receiver is released This timer applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed Selection Time seconds 3 through 30 Default 10s Programming 1 Enter 220 Display TIE Timer 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service Toll Restriction 306 E amp M Programming 4 3 TIE Line Routing Table Programming 4 3 TIE Line RoutingTable Programming 340 TIE Line Routing Table Description The TIE line routing table can be programmed This table is referenced by the system to identify the outside line route when an extension user makes a TIE call A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the first three digits except the TIE line access number of the dialled number This programme assigns the TIE line access number and outside line group hunt sequence Selection Location number 01 through 32 TIE line access number 1 through 3 digits Outside line group hunt sequence number 1 through 8 5 entry max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 340 Display example TIE Route 2 Press NEXT Dis
57. an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 It is not necessary to install the Pay Tone Card on the ISDN Line Unit 158 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming Features Guide References Incoming Outside Call Information Display Hotel Application General Programming 159 2 5 Outside Line Programming 441 L ineHunting Sequence Description Assigns the hunting sequence of idle lines seizing from the smallest to the largest line number or vice versa in an outside line group on an outside line group basis Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X Xall outside line groups Small Large Large Small Default All outside line groups Small Large Programming 1 Enter 441 Display Line Hunting 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group nu
58. call Display example Call Repeat 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 8 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA 206 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 813 Floating Number Assignment Description Assigns the floating numbers for External Pagers DISA Direct Inward System Access messages modem DTA Digital Test Access and extension groups These numbers can be used in the same way extension numbers are used for station access Selection Floating station Pager1 through 4 DISA1 DISA2 MODEM DTA E Grp 1 through 8 Pager2 through 4 are available for the KX TD1232 only Floating number 2 through 4 digits Default Pager 12196 Pager 22197 Pager 32296 Pager 42297 DISA 12198 DISA 2 298 MODEM 299 DTA 199 E Grp 12191 E Grp 22192 E Grp 32193 E Grp 4 194 E Grp 52291 E Grp 62292 E Grp 72293 E Grp 8 294 Programming 1 Enter 813 Display FLT EXT NO 2 Press NEXT to programme Pager 1 Display example Pagerl EXT196 To programme another floating station keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 3 Enter a floating number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new floating number 4 Press STORE 5 To programme another floating station keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 6
59. cancelled The System Password entered is not shown on the display The System Password can be changed by System Programming Refer to Section 2 2 107 System Password During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time 14 Programming Instructions 1 3 Programming Methods 1 3 Programming Methods Advancing to the next stage When SYS PGM NO is displayed you can select one of the following To goto programme 000 press the NEXT button To goto another programme enter the 3 digit programme address Rotation of jack number Each jack of the Digital Super Hybrid System supports the connection of a digital proprietary telephone and a single line device with different extension numbers eXtra Device Port XDP function To programme this function it is necessary to assign two parts for each jack The first part of jack one is 01 1 The second part of jack one is 01 2 The first part of jack two is 02 1 and so on The NEXT and PREV buttons can be used to move from jack to jack as required Example NEXT NEXT NEXT 301 1 301 2 l 02 1 302 2 PREV PREV PREV Note The first part of a jack is for a DPT of a XDP assigned jack The second part is for a single line device Programme 600 JEXtra Device Port assigns which jacks are XDP Storing your data Press STORE to store your data The STORE indi
60. charge margin rate To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Telephone charge Real charge x ee The telephone charge will be printed out when checking out Features Guide References Hotel Application General Programming 51 2 1 Manager Programming 0015 Q uick Dialling Number Set Description Stores the desired extension or telephone numbers for Quick Dialling Quick dialling numbers must be assigned in programme 104 Flexible Quick Dialling Number Set Selection Default Location number 01 through 80 Desired number 16 digits max All location numbers Not stored Programming 1 Enter 015 Display Quick Dial Press NEXT Display Location NO Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored Enter a desired number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions Each quick dialling number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 F FLASH P PAUSE and hyphen Features Guide References Quick Dialling 52 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 2 2 System Programming 100
61. display shows the contents programmed for port 01 FortheKX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available ISDN Programming 235 3 1 Manager Programming The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by 121 Assignment of Denomination Features Guide References Budget Management Charge Fee Reference 236 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming 3 2 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Description Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature numbers for system features Feature Number List Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 1 02 2nd hundred extension block 2 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call 0 18 Automatic line access ARS 9 19 Outside line group line access 8 20 System speed dialling x 21 Station speed dialling 3x 22 Station speed dialling programming 30 23 Doorphone call 31 24 Paging external 32 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 33 27 Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup outside line 4x 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve outside line 53 34 Last number redial 35 Call park Call park retrieve 52 36 Account code entry 49 37 D
62. extension group There are six Station Hunting types available Circular Terminating Voice Mail VM Automated Attendant AA Ring Group and Uniform Call Distribution UCD If circular hunting is assigned for a group all of the extensions in the group are searched until an idle one is found If terminating hunting is assigned searching stops at the extension which has the largest jack number in the group If VM hunting is assigned all of the VM ports of an extension group are searched until an idle one is found whichallows Voice Mail Service If AA hunting is assigned all of the AA ports of an extension group are searched until an idle one is found which allows AA Service If Ring Group is assigned all of the extensions in the ring group ring simultaneously If UCD is assigned group members are hunted in a circular way Selection Extension group number 1 through 8 X X all extension groups Disable no hunting Terminate terminating Circular VM voice mail AA automated attendant RING UCD Default All extension groups Disable Programming 1 Enter 106 Display Call Hunting 2 Press NEXT Display EXT GRP NO 3 Enter an extension group number To enter extension group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Groupl Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 To programme another extension group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and
63. for each programme Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and X The character X can be used as a wild card character Features Guide References Toll Restriction 126 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 312 ARS Mode Description Allows you to turn on or off the Automatic Route Selection ARS mode ARS if enabled selects the least expensive route to be used for an outside call Selection On Off Default Off Programming 1 Enter 312 Display ARS Mode 2 Press NEXT Display example ARS Off Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END o Conditions f Off is selected the Automatic Line Access feature functions instead of ARS Programmes 313 through 331 are used to programme ARS Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS Outside Line Access General Programming 127 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 313 A RS Time Description Assigns times for the four Automatic Route Selection ARS time schedules It is possible to split a day into four time zones maximum so that the least expensive line is selected for that time According to the service hours and charges offered by your carriers enter the starting time of each zone Selection Time schedule Time A Time B Time C Time D e Time hour 1 through 12 Disable no schedule AM PM Default Time A
64. has the lowest PS registration number Features Guide References Class of Service COS 362 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 658 PS Extension Group Assignment Description Assigns each PS to an extension group Extension groups are used for Group Call Pickup Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all PS registration numbers Extension group number 1 through 8 Default All PSs Extension group 1 Programming 1 Enter 658 Display PS EXT Group 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 EXG01 4 Enter an extension group number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new extension group number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of eight extension groups Each PS can only belong to one group e To assign all PSs to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number Features Guide References Call Pickup DECT Programming 363 5 3 Extension Programming Extension Group 364 DECT Programming 5 3 Exte
65. line 1 retry conversation If disabled X will simply be dialled 11 Selects whether the display which is 0 not change 1 Incoming Outside assigned in programme 1 change to Call Information 612 I ncoming Call Display and duration time Display 676 P S Incoming Call Display changes after answering an incoming call or not 12 Selects how long the system keeps the 0 35s 1 Door Opener door opener unlocked 1 5s 13 Enables or disables the automatic time 0 enable 1 ISDN adjustment The time is automatically 1 disable adjusted when the first call after 3 00 AM is received 14 Selects the bearer when using a single 0 Speech 1 ISDN line telephone 1 3 1k Audio ISDN Programming 293 3 5 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 07 15 Selects the bearer when using a proprietary telephone or DECT portable station 3 1k Audio Speech ISDN 16 Reserved 08 Reserved Enables or disables the MCID service even after the caller hangs up If enabled the call will not be disconnected until you go on hook enable disable Malicious Call Identification MCID 3 16 Reserved Selection Default See Default shown in the explanation table Area code 01 through 08 Selection See Selection in the explanation table Programming 1 Un A o
66. night switching is not desired select Disable in step 4 You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Night Service General Programming 59 2 2 System Programming 103 Automatic Access Outside Line Group Assignment Description Assigns the sequence in which outside line groups will be accessed when in Automatic Line Access mode When a user dials the feature number for automatic line access default 9 or presses the Loop CO button an idle line is searched for in the programmed outside line group order Selection Outside line group number 1 through 8 in desired order Default 12345678 Programming 1 Enter 103 Display Local Access 2 Press NEXT Display example Access 12345678 3 Enter the outside line group numbers in priority from top to bottom To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new order 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e The system supports a maximum of eight outside line groups Automatic Line Access feature works only if the Automatic Route Selection mode is turned off in programme 312 ARS Mode Features Guide References Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line Outside Line Access 60 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 104 Flexible Quick Dialling Number Set Description Assigns the flexible quick dialling numbers The desired extens
67. press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired selection number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers 01 through 16 1st through 16th extension blocks 1 Enter 100 2 Press NEXT 3 Enter 00 Display All Feature CLR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Required digits and valid entries for the feature numbers are as follows 346 DECT Programming 5 2 System Programming Feature number type Required digits Valid entry Extension blocks other pa PBX extensions 1 or 2 digits 0 through 9 TIE line access number 1 through 3 digits 0 through 9 Other feature numbers 1 through 3 digits 0 through 9 x tis possible to assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective extension blocks Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programmes 00 3 Extension Number Set 0 12 ISDN Extension Number Set 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set 130 P hantom Extension Number Set 813 Floating Number Assignment and 671 PS Extension Number Set e If Xr ft is included in a feature number dial pulse telephone users cannot access the feature Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid Valid entry examples 30 and 31 210 and 211 Invalid entry examples 5 and 5 30 and 301 e If you delete a feature number the feature cannot be used by dialling operation You can remove all the fe
68. service mode this programme will not be affected m 7 Selectsthe result when an outside call is 0 enable 1 Voice Mail routed to a voice mail port by IRNA For 1 disable Integration both Inband and DPT Integration When the voice mail port is in the VM service mode enable VM service mode disable The mode will change to the AA service mode Only when Inband When the voice mail port is in the AA service mode enable The mode will change to the VM service mode and a Follow On ID is sent disable AA service mode 336 E amp M Programming 4 6 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 06 8 Enables or disables sending outside line 0 enable 1 E amp M TIE Line access number 9 to a TIE line When 1 disable Service you dial outside line access number 9 and the outside line is busy the system can automatically send outside line access number 9 to a TIE line so that you can access the outside line through another PBX 9 Enables or disables the ARS with 0 enable 1 ARS DTMF function 1 disable 11 10 Assigns the source of Music Source 1 00 internal music 00 BGM for Music on Hold and BGM source Music on Hold 01 external music source 11 tone 12 Reserved 13 Enables or disables dial tone 2 when an 0 disable 1 Dial Tone extension sets programmable extension 1
69. source press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new music source number 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to programme BGM Display example BGM Musicl 6 Enter a music source number To select no music source press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new music source number 7 Press STORE 8 Press END Conditions The music source is a user supplied item For KX TD816 one music source can be installed for KX TD1232 two music sources can be installed per system Music sources 1 and 2 are connected to the Master System 3 and 4 are to the Slave if available Any music source can be used by either system e The system is provided with an internal music source By default setting internal music source is used as Music Source 1 It is possible to select external music source or tone for General Programming 195 2 8 Resource Programming Music Source 1 in programme 99 0 System Additional Information Area 06 Bits 11 and 10 To disable music press CLEA in steps 3 and 6 e Programme 804 External Pager BGM is used to enable disable BGM for each external pager Features Guide References Background Music BGM 196 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 804 External Pager BGM Description Used to determine which external pagers will receive Background Music BGM External BGM is turned on and off by the operator Selection External pager number KX T
70. step 4 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 When you change the PS registration number by pressing NEXT or PREV the outside line number will not changed Example PS01 CO06 Press NEXT PS02 CO06 Features Guide References Direct In Lines DIL Night Service 366 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 661 662 P S Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night Description Determines which outside lines can be accessed by a PS in both the day and night modes PS users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned outside lines Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all PS registration numbers e Outside line number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Enabl enable Disab disable Default All PSs All outside lines Enable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 661 for day or 662 for night Display example PS CO Out Day 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 COO01 Enabl 4 Enter the outside line numbe You can also keep pressing munt e desired outside line number is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressin
71. the desired extension group number Un 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END General Programming 65 2 2 System Programming Conditions e Programme 602 Extension Group Assignment is used to assign the extension group members The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for KX TD1232 for connection to a Voice Processing System as VM or AA ports e To assign all extension groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for extension group 1 Features Guide References Ring Group Station Hunting Uniform Call Distribution UCD Voice Mail Integration for Inband 66 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 107 System Password Description Assigns the password required for entering System Programming mode and for maintenance from a personal computer Selection Password 4 through 7 digits Default 1234 Programming 1 Enter 107 Display System Password 2 Press NEXT Display Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new password 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions The password can be from four to seven digits long consisting of 0 through 9 e If less than four digits are entered they are not stored e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Com
72. through 08 KX TD1232 09 through 12 Master 21 through 24 Slave X all outside lines 6 db 3 db 0 db 3 db Default All outside lines 3 db Programming 1 Enter 443 Display Voice Level TX 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 09 you can also press NEXT Display example CO09 3db 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 Press END Un Conditions To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 325 4 4 TIE Line Programming 444 Voice Level Receive Description Assigns the received voice level on an outside line basis This programme is valid only when the voice path type is set to 4 wire Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 05 through 08 KX TD1232 09 through 12 Master 21 through 24 Slave X all outside lines 6 db 3 db 0 db 3 db Default All outside lines 3 db Programming 1 Enter 444 Display Voice Level RX 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 09 you can also press NEXT Display example CO09 3db 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 Press END Un Conditions To assign all outside lines
73. to be changed if required Each bit in each Area represents a programming item Chart for the Areas and Bits Bit Number 10 918 m Nn m Un Em EN Em w Em N Em Em Em Display Example Area 01 Area 02 Area 03 Area 04 Area 05 Area 06 Area 07 zyrarrarr ama FIF RIE Rlololo FIP RIB RlOlolR FIP RIE Rlololo FIF RIB RlololR P pBlojH ojol o P pjlojHj jol olo FIP Rlol Rlol olo FIP BIPl olo o B FIPF RIPl ololo R s FIF RIPlolo Riol FIP Rlololololol FIP RIPlolo Riol FIP Rlololo Riol FIF RIPlolololol s HIRIE RIG OOIE Area 08 ISDN Programming 285 3 5 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 01 1 Sound source during transfer 0 ringback tone 1 Call Transfer 1 Music on Hold e Music on Hold 2 Result of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly and then placing down the Hold Hold handset during an outside call single 1 disconnection line telephones only 3 Result of pressing the FLASH button on 0 disconnection 0 External proprietary telephones during an signal Feature Access outside call External Feature Access is 1 External Feature e Flash effective only during a call via an Access analogue outside line 4 7 Reserved 8 Enables o
74. to one selection press the X key in step 3 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service 326 E amp M Programming 44 TIE Line Programming 445 TIE Receive Dial Description Assigns whether the system receives TIE dial numbers on an outside line basis If No is selected the dialled number is treated as a local number and sent to DIL 1 1 or DIL 1 N Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 05 through 08 KX TD1232 09 through 12 Master 21 through 24 Slave X all outside lines e Yes No Default All outside line ports Yes Programming 1 Enter 445 Display TIE Receive Dial 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 09 you can also press NEXT Display example CO09 Yes 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 Press END Un Conditions To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 327 4 5 Resource Programming 4 5 Resource Programming 811 D ISA TIE User Codes Description Assigns the Direct Inward System Access DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service COS to each code The code COS determines the toll restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller Selection DISA TIE user code number 01 through 32 DISA TIE user code
75. you to select between three display types when an incoming call is received Calling The incoming caller s telephone number is displayed Called The called telephone number is displayed Line Name The outside line name assigned in the 417 programme is displayed Selection PSregistration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Xz all PS registration numbers Display Types Calling Called Line Name Default All PSs Calling Programming 1 Enter 676 Display PS Incoming Disp 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Calling 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all PSs to one selection press the Xey in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number e Ifthe receiving call is in the 1 N status the display only shows outside line number 378 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming Features Guide References Display Message Incoming Outside Call Information Display DECT Programming 379 5 3 Extension Programming 680 C ell Stati
76. 0 1 Enter 990 Display System Add Inf Press NEXT Display Area NO Enter an area code 01 through 08 Display example 0010100011000001 Keep pressing mto n amp the cursor to the desired bit Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and enter the new selection To programme another bit repeat steps 4 and 5 Press STORE To programme another area press SELECT and the desired area code Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END 294 ISDN Programming 3 5 Optional Programming Conditions None Features Guide References None ISDN Programming 295 3 5 Optional Programming 296 ISDN Programming Section E amp M Programming E amp M Programming 297 4 1 System Programming 4 1 System Programming 100 F lexible Numbering Description Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature numbers for system features Feature Number List Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 1 02 2nd hundred extension block 2 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call 0 18 Automatic line access ARS 9 19 Outside line group line access 8 20 System speed dialling x 21 Station speed dialling 3x 22 Station speed dialling programming 30 23 Doorphone call 31 24 Paging
77. 1 Loop CO CO 02 and CO 03 Not stored 100 Flexible Numbering See Feature Number List 109 Expansion Unit Type KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 650 PS Registration All PSs Not stored 651 PS Termination Not applicable 653 PS Extension Name Set All PSs Not stored 654 SXDP Assignment All jacks Enable DefaultValues 405 Programme Default 655 PS Budget Management All PSs 0 656 PS ChargeVerification Assignment All PSs Enable 657 PS Class of Service All PSs Primary Secondary COS 1 COS 1 658 PS Extension Group Assignment All PSs Extension group 1 659 660 P S DIL 1 N Extension Day Nigl ntAll PSs All outside lines Disable Day Night Assignment Day Night 661 662 P S Outgoing Permitted Outside LineAll PSs All outside lines Enable Day Night 663 664 P SDoorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night All PSs Disable No doorphones Day Night 665 PSVoice Mail Access Codes All PSs Not stored 671 PS Extension Number Set All PSs Not stored 672 PS Password Set All PSs 1234 673 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for PS All PSs Not stored 676 PS Incoming Call Display All PSs Calling 680 Cell Station Number Assignment for Not stored Master CS 681 PS Radio System ID Reference Not store
78. 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT to programme the Master System To programme Slave press NEXT again 348 DECT Programming 5 2 System Programming NA UR WwW 9 Display example Master C E1 E2 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press mrogramme another Area if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area is displayed Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are completed Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 10 Press NEXT to programme the Slave System Display example Slave C E1 E2 Repeat steps 3 through 7 if required 10 Press END Conditions The following units can be installed in the slots C 4 CO lines KX TD180 1 2 ISDN S0 lines KX TD280 S2 6 ISDN SO lines KX TD286 S3 1 PRI ISDN line KX TD290 EM 4 E amp M lines KX TD184 E E1 E2 8 Extension lines KX TD170 KX TD144 or KX TD146 A Al A2 16 SLT lines KX TD174 There are two expansion areas in the KX TD816 areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top One extension line unit and one outside line CO ISDN SO E amp M unit can be installed There are three expansion areas in each system for the KX TD1232 areas 1 2 and 3 from bottom to top Up to two extension line units and one outside line CO ISDN S0 E amp M unit can be installed The PRI ISDN line unit can be instal
79. 166 219 221 291 293 336 338 389 391 Call Forwarding to Outside Line 166 Call Forwarding Follow Me 224 Call Forwarding No Answer Time 104 Call Transfer 165 Call Transfer to Outside Line 165 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 248 281 283 376 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 250 Cell Station Number Assignment for Master CS 380 Characters 17 Charge Display Selection 83 Charge limitation 49 235 358 Charge Margin Rate 51 Charge Verification Assignment 85 360 Charge Verification ID Code Set 86 Circular hunting 65 Class of Service COS 175 224 277 361 CLEAR button 12 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation 248 281 283 376 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for Extension 281 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension 283 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for PS 376 CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction 250 COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation 218 248 281 283 290 335 376 388 Conference button 38 228 342 Confirmation tone 15 199 215 287 332 385 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP 218 248 281 283 290 335 376 388 Console 43 Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment 43 COS Class of Service 175 224 277 361 COS Additional Information 224 D Date 28 Date and Time Set 28 Day Night Service 57 58 Day Night Service Starting Time 58 Day Night Service Switching Mode 57
80. 21 Plan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These eight plans are used to analyse the number which the user dials and decide the route plan for the call If the user dialled number is registered in Plan 1 then Routing Plan 1 is selected forthe call Automatic Route Selection ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 match ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 programmes 322 through 329 respectively Selection Location number 01 through 50 Leading digit number 7 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a programme address 314 through 321 Display example ARS Leading PL 1 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 3 Enter a location numbe To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a leading digit numbe To delete the current entry press CLEA To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END 130 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Conditions Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character X can be used as a wild card character Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS General Programming 131 2 4 TRS ARS Programming
81. 228 342 M Mailbox number 185 216 288 333 371 386 Malicious Call Identification MCID 222 294 339 392 Manager 39 41 44 230 Manager Extension Assignment 41 Margin Rate 51 Master CS 380 MCID Malicious Call Identification 222 294 339 392 Message Waiting button 38 228 342 Message Waiting Control 96 Message Waiting lamp 214 286 331 384 Message Waiting Port Set 100 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 118 Modem Standard 209 MSN Multiple Subscriber Number 218 221 264 290 293 335 338 388 391 MSN Assignment 268 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN 218 221 264 290 293 335 338 388 391 Music on Hold 195 220 292 337 390 Music Source Use 195 N NEXT button 12 Night button 38 228 Night Service 57 58 O Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 172 Off Hook Monitor 95 OGM Outgoing Message 117 219 291 336 389 OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement 172 One Touch Dialling button 38 228 342 One Touch Transfer 68 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button 68 Operator 41 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 41 Option mode 170 OTMF command signals 73 Outgoing Message OGM 117 219 291 336 389 Outgoing Message Time 117 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night 181 367 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension 279 Outside Line Connection Assignment 136 Outside Line Group 60 Outside Line Group Assignment
82. 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press NEXT Display example Slave V 34 33600 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 7 Press END e Conditions Select the standard used by your modem This assignment is effective for both the Master and Slave systems Features Guide References System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer General Programming 211 2 8 Resource Programming 818 D ISA Built in Automated Attendant Number Description Assigns the DISA Direct Inward System Access built in automated attendant AA number The extension number and the floating number can be assigned as a one digit number and used as a DISA built in automated attendant number Selection DISA built in automated attendant number 0 through 9 Extension number Floating number 2 through 4 digits Default Disable Programming 1 Enter 818 Display DISA AA 2 Press NEXT Display example Dial NO 3 Enter a DISA built in automated attendant number To enter DISA AA number 0 you can also press NEXT Display example Dial 0 Disable 4 Enter an extension or floating number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new floating number Display example Dial 0 EXT112 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another DISA AA number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DISA AA number 7 Repeat steps 3 throug
83. 6 01 through 04 KX TD1232 01 through 12 Location number 01 through 10 Extension number 2 through 4 digits 0 the same as programme 990 Area 05 bits 7 and 8 assignments Disable Default All ports All locations Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 448 for day or 449 for night Display MSN Ring Day 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 01 Disable Location number Port number 4 Enter an extension number or 0 To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To select Disable press CLEAR Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV Repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another port press SELECT and the desired port number 00 102 wn Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END 270 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Conditions Each extension number can be 2 through 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 When 0 is assigned the incoming MSN number is sent to the destination assigned in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 05 bits 7 and 8 These programmes become available when MSN is selected in programme 452 453 I SDN Ring Service Assignment Day Night e FortheKX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12
84. 99 4 1 System Programming Selection Selection number 01 through 89 See Feature Number List for the corresponding features Feature number 1 or 2 digits for selection numbers 01 through 16 68 through 83 1 through 3 digits for selection numbers 17 through 67 84 through 89 Default See Feature Number List Programming 1 Enter 100 Display FLX Numbering 2 Press NEXT Display Select NO 3 Enter a selection number To enter selection number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 EXT BL 1 4 Enter the feature number To delete the feature number press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another selection press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired selection number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers 01 through 16 1st through 16th extension blocks 1 Enter 100 2 Press NEXT 3 Enter 00 Display All Feature CLR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Required digits and valid entries for the feature numbers are as follows 300 E amp M Programming 4 1 System Programming Feature number type Required digits Valid entry Extension blocks other pa PBX extensions 1 or 2 digits 0 through 9 TIE line access number 1 through 3 digits 0 through 9 Other feature numbers 1 through 3 digits 0 t
85. AGE button VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted preceding the GETMSG command above This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the MESSAGE indicator Other programming required programme addresses 609 665 990 Area 02 bit 8 B If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant AA Service An AA port answers an incoming outside call to provide AA services such as call transfer receiving a message Required entries selections VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted before the LV MSG code if an operator transfers a call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that the AA port can be switched to the VM port temporarily Other programming required programme addresses 106 602 Selection LV MSG GETMSG AA SVC VM SVC DTMF signal number 16 digits max General Programming 73 2 2 System Programming Default LV MSG H GETMSG H AA SVC 48 VM SVC 6 Programming 1 Enter 114 Display VM Command Set 2 Press NEXT to programme the LV MSG command To programme another command keep pressing NEXT until the desired command is displayed Display example LV MSG H 3 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 4 Press STORE 5 To programme another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until t
86. Code Entry Mode an account code is required to make an outside call IfVerified Toll Restriction Override is assigned an account code is only required for a toll call and overrides toll restriction Selection Location number 001 through 128 e Account code 10 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 105 Display Account Code 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter an account code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new account code 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Each code has a maximum of 10 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e Programme 508 Account Code Entry Mode is used to select the Account Code Entry mode Account codes having 99 in any part or ending with 9 are invalid as 99 is used as a delimiter when entering an account code General Programming 63 2 2 System Programming Features Guide References Account Code Entry Toll Restriction 64 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type Description Used to enable or disable hunting and set the Station Hunting type for each
87. D Conditions Neitherjack number 01 nor the manager extension can be assigned as a voice mail port jack The jack numbers correspond to the voice mail port in numerical order Example Stored jack numbers Jacks 02 03 05 08 Jack 02 Voice mail numbers 01 02 Jack 032 Voice mail numbers 03 04 Jack 052Voice mail numbers 05 06 Jack 08 2 Voice mail numbers 07 08 Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 78 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Description Assigns the extension number for the voice mail number These numbers can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access This programme is available when this system is connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP200 Selection e Voice mail number VM KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 16 Extension Number 2 through 4 digits Default KX TD816 VM 01 165 VM 02 166 VM 03 167 VM 04 168 VM 05 169 VM 06 170 VM 07 177 VM 08 178 KX TD1232 VM 01 165 VM 02 166 VM 03 167 VM 04 168 VM 05 169 VM 06 170 VM 07 177 VM 08 178 VM 09 171 VM 10 172 VM 11 173 VM 12 174 VM 13 175 VM 14 176 VM 15 179 VM 16 180 Programming 1 Enter 118 Display VM EXT NO Set 2 Press NEXT Display VM NO 3 Enter a voice mail number To ent
88. D but press Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME V or rorate the Jog Dial in the counter clockwise direction To go to the next smaller programme address do not press END but press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME or rorate the Jog Dial in the counter clockwise direction 18 Tells you what you should notice or consider when doing the programming 19 Lists all of the features related to the System Speed Dialling programming These features are described in the Features Guide Programming Structur Programme Programming Group Description Address 0XX Manager Programming These programmes may be accessed by the syste manager of the customer to meet frequent changes requested by the customer 1XX System Programming Entire system programming 2XX Timer Programming Flexible system timer setting 3XX TRS ARS TIE Line Assignment of Toll Restriction Automatic Route Routing Table Programming Selection ARS or TIE Line Routing Table 4XX Outside Line ISDN Line Setting of outside line outside line group ISDN line TIE Line Programming or TIE line values 5XX COS Programming Setting of Class of Service COS 6XX Extension Programming Setting of extension values 24 Programming Instructions 1 6 Programming Example Programming Structur Programme Programming Group Description Address 8XX Resource Programming Assignment of customer supplied peripherals connecte
89. D816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Name 10 characters max Default All PSs Not stored Programming 1 Enter 653 Display PS EXT Name Set 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Not Stored 4 Enter the name e For entering characters see Section 1 4Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Digital Wireless Connection 356 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 654 SXDP Assignment Description Disables or enables the Super EXtra Device Port SXDP feature for wired extensions Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 X KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X 1 first part 2 second part X all jacks Enable Disable Default All jacks Enable Programming 1 Enter 654 Display SXDP Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter the jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 Enabl
90. D816 1 KX TD1232 1 through 4 Disable sends no BGM Enable sends BGM Default All external pagers Disable Programming 1 Enter 804 Display Ext Pag BGM 2 Press NEXT Display Pager NO 3 Enter an external pager number To enter pager number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Pagerl Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another pager press NEXT or PREV or SELEC and the desired external pager number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions The external pager is a user supplied item One external pager can be installed for KX TD816 and two external pagers can be installed for KX TD1232 Inthe case of KX TD816 please skip steps 6 and 7 e For the KX TD1232 external pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e Programme 803 Music Source Use is used to select the music source to be used for BGM General Programming 197 2 8 Resource Programming Features Guide References Background Music BGM 198 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone Description Used to remove the confirmation tone for external pagers The default setting sends confirmation tone 2 to the external pagers before paging is broadcast This programming applies to all the external pagers Selection On Off Default O
91. DDI Direct Dialling In 218 221 290 293 335 338 388 391 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night 218 246 290 335 388 DDI Translation Table 244 Delayed Ringing 179 Denomination 84 Detecting a hooking signal 216 288 333 386 Dial Mode Selection 140 142 144 216 288 333 386 Dial mode call blocking 140 Dial mode DTMF 140 Dial mode Pulse 140 Dial Start Time 113 Dialtone 214 220 286 292 331 337 384 390 DIL Direct In Lines 146 179 409 Index Direct Dialling In DDI 218 221 290 293 335 338 388 391 Direct In Lines DIL 146 179 Direct Inward System Access DISA 91 221 293 338 391 DISA Direct Inward System Access 91 221 293 338 391 DISA AA Wait Time 121 DISA Built in Automated Attendant 121 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number 212 DISA Delayed Answer Time 115 DISA DTMF Repeat 206 DISA Prolong Time 116 DISA Security Type 202 DISA Tone Detection 203 DISA User Codes 204 328 Disconnect Time 155 Do Not Disturb 169 Do Not Disturb Override 169 Door opener 221 293 338 391 Doorphone 183 369 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night 183 369 DSS button 38 68 228 342 DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency 140 DTMF mode 140 DTMF signals 71 206 214 286 331 384 DTMF Time 144 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF 140 E E amp M Signal Assignment 305 EFA External Feature Access 153 Emergency Dial Number Set 47 END button 12
92. DTMF Set LV MSG H GETMSG H AA SVC 8 VM SVC 6 115 Adjust Time 1 00 AM 116 ROM Version Display Not applicable 117 Voice Mail Number Assignment All jacks Blank 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set KX TD816 VM 01 165 VM 02 166 VM 03 167 VM 04 168 VM 05 169 VM 06 170 VM 07 177 VM 08 178 KX TD1232 VM 01 165 VM 02 166 VM 03 167 VM 04 168 VM 05 169 VM 06 170 VM 07 177 VM 08 178 VM 09 171 VM 10 172 VM 11 173 VM 12 174 VM 13 175 VM 14 176 VM 15 179 VM 16 180 Default Values 397 Programme Default 119 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment All voice mail numbers EXG 1 120 Charge Display Selection in Meter 121 Assignment of Denomination Not stored 122 Charge Verification Assignment All jacks Enable 123 Charge Verification ID Code Set 1234 124 Hotel Application Disable 125 User Password 1234 126 UCD Overflow All UCD groups Not stored 127 UCD Time Table All time tables Not stored 130 Phantom Extension Number Set All locations Not stored 148 Off Hook Monitor Enable 154 Message Waiting Control All units Not stored 155 Message Waiting Lamp Assignment 1 156 Message Waiting Port Set All units All message waiting ports Not stored 200 Hold Recall Time 60 s 201 Transfer Recall Time 12 rings 202 Call F
93. Display Transfer Recall 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Onering is equivalent to five seconds e You cannot leave the entry empty e Operator 1 can also be the Transfer Recall destination which can be assigned in programme 99 0O System Additional Information Area 02 Bit 1 Features Guide References Call Transfer General Programming 103 2 3 Timer Programming 202 C all Forwarding No Answer Time Description Sets the number of rings for the Call Forwarding No Answer feature If a call is not answered after the programmed number of rings the call is forwarded to the destination Selection Number of rings 1 through 12 Default 3 rings Programming 1 Enter 202 Display No Answer Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 3 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Onering is equivalent to five seconds This timer is also used for Intercept Routing If an incoming DISA Direct Inward System Access call to the Intercept Routing destination is not answered before this timer expires the call will be disconnected e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Call Forwardi
94. ELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END 34 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming Conditions There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX TD816 and 128 extension numbers for KX TD1232 Each extension number can be two three or four digits consisting of 0 through 9 The xnd keys cannot be used e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Anextension number is invalid if the first or second digits do not match with the programme 10 O Flexible Numbering 01 16 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks setting If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some extensions have two digits and some have three digits If two digits are assigned some have three digits and some have four digits Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack If eXtra Device Port XDP is disabled for the jack in programme 600 EXtra Device Port the extension number of the second part XX 2 is not available XX jack number e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods e Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follo
95. Entering Characters 17 Entering the programming mode 14 Entering the user programming mode 22 Executive Busy Override 167 168 Executive Busy Override Deny 168 Expansion Unit 69 241 302 348 Expansion Unit Type 69 241 302 348 Extension Group Assignment 177 363 Extension Name Set 36 Extension Number Set 34 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 270 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 218 290 335 388 Extensions Used for Programming 10 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit 163 215 287 332 385 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Time 107 External Feature Access EFA 153 External Pager BGM 197 External Pager Confirmation Tone 199 EXtra Device Port XDP 15 35 41 44 173 F Feature numbers 53 237 298 344 First Digit Time 109 221 293 306 338 391 Flash 153 215 287 332 385 FLASH button 12 214 286 331 384 Flash Time 153 Flexible CO Button Assignment 38 228 342 Flexible Numbering 53 237 298 344 Flexible Quick Dialling Number Set 61 Floating Number Assignment 207 Follow On ID 74 219 291 336 389 FWD DND button 38 228 342 G Group CO button 38 229 342 H Hold Recall Time 102 Hookswitch 214 286 331 384 Host PBX 150 Host PBX Access Codes 150 Hotel Application 87 218 290 335 388 Hunting Type 65 I Incoming Call Display 187 221 293 338 378 391 Initial display 216 288 333 386 Inter Digit
96. Example Area 01 Area 02 Area 03 Area 04 Area 05 Area 06 Area 07 zyrarrarr ama FIF RIE Rlololo FIP RIB RlOlolR FIP RIE Rlololo FIF RIB RlololR P pBlojH ojol o P pjlojHj jol olo FIP Rlol Rlol olo FIP BIPl olo o B FIPF RIPl ololo R s FIF RIPlolo Riol FIP Rlololololol FIP RIPlolo Riol FIP Rlololo Riol FIF RIBlolololol P elje seljojololeC Area 08 DECT Programming 383 5 4 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 01 1 Sound source during transfer 0 ringback tone 1 Call Transfer 1 Music on Hold e Music on Hold 2 Result of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly and then placing down the Hold Hold handset during an outside call single 1 disconnection line telephones only 3 Result of pressing the FLASH button on 0 disconnection 0 External proprietary telephones during an signal Feature Access outside call External Feature Access is 1 External Feature e Flash effective only during a call via an Access analogue outside line 4 7 Reserved 8 Enables or disables the dial tone 0 disable 1 None between obtaining an outside line and 1 enable dialling the phone number when using the one touch dial redial or speed dial function 9 Result
97. Extension Programming 617 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for Extension Description Assigns a CLIP COLP number for each extension Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 Xzall jacks 1 first part 2 second part CLIP COLP number 16 digits max Default All jacks Not stored Programming 1 Enter 617 Display CLIP for EXT 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a CLIP COLP number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Each CLIP COLP number consists of 0 through 9 e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Toassign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programme for jack 01 ISDN Programming 281 3 4 Extension Programming Features Guide References Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP 282 ISDN Programming 3 4 Extension Prog
98. Extension to Outside Line Call Duration All COS Disable Limit 503 Call Transfer to Outside Line All COS Disable 504 Call Forwarding to Outside Line All COS Disable 505 Executive Busy Override All COS Disable 506 Executive Busy Override Deny All COS Enable 400 Default Values Programme Default 507 Do Not Disturb Override All COS Disable 508 Account Code Entry Mode All COS Option 509 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA All COS Enable 600 EXtra Device Port All jacks Disable 601 Class of Service All jacks 1 2 Primary Secondary COS 1 COS 1 602 Extension Group Assignment All jacks 1 2 Extension group 1 603 604 D IL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night All jacks 1 2 All outside lines Immediate ringing Day Night 605 606 O utgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night All jacks 1 2 All outside lines Enable Day Night 607 608 D oorphone Ringing Assignment Jack 01 1 All doorphones Other jacks no Day Night doorphone Day Night 609 Voice Mail Access Codes All jacks Not stored 612 Incoming Call Display All jacks Calling 616 Live Call Screening Recording Mode All jacks Stop Record Assignment 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Outgoing calls All Incoming calls On Printout 801 SMDR F
99. Flexible Numbering Description Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature numbers for system features Feature Number List Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 1 02 2nd hundred extension block 2 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call 0 18 Automatic line access ARS 9 19 Outside line group line access 8 20 System speed dialling x 21 Station speed dialling 3x 22 Station speed dialling programming 30 23 Doorphone call 31 24 Paging external 32 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 33 27 Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup outside line 4x 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve outside line 53 34 Last number redial 35 Call park Call park retrieve 52 36 Account code entry 49 37 Door opener 55 General Programming 53 2 2 System Programming Feature Number List Number Feature Default 38 External feature access 6 39 Station feature clear 790 40 Message waiting 70 41 Outgoing message 36 42 Call forwarding Do not disturb 710 43 Call pickup deny 720 44 Data line security 730 45 Call waiting OHCA Whisper OHCA 731 46 Executive busy overrid
100. Hook Call Announcement OHCA function Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Enable Disable Default All COS Enable Programming 1 Enter 509 Display OHCA 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Toassign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 172 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 600 EXtra Device Port Description EXtra Device Port XDP allows a single line telephone SLT to be connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone DPT This programme assigns which jacks are XDP The SLT and DPT of the programmed jack work as independent extensions Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all jacks Disable Enable Default All jacks Disable Programming 1 Enter 600 Display XDP Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can als
101. ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 255 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 425 I SDN Layer 1 Active Mode Description Assigns the active mode of Layer 1 on an ISDN port basis Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports Permanent Call Default KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Call Other ports Permanent KX TD1232 All ports Permanent Programming 1 Enter 425 Display L1 Active Mode 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Permanent 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Forthe KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available Toassign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 e After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective 256 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 257 3 3 ISDN Line P
102. ISDN port basis Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports Fix 0 through 63 Automatic Default KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Automatic Other ports Fix 0 KX TD1232 All ports Fix 0 Programming 1 Enter 428 Display TEI Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Fix 0 4 Enter the TEI To change the current entry press CLEA and enter the new number If you do not enter a number Automatic is automatically assigned 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Forthe KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e f Point is selected in programme 426 assign the fixed TEL If Multipoint is selected assign Automatic 262 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 e After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 263 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 429 I SDN Extension Mult
103. Incoming ASSienment peis tiae aeei eo ari entrent nennen 313 43 3 TIE Outgoing Assignment annn i a aea aa 314 Table of Contents 7 434 TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit sese 316 435 TIE Added Number eee e cedo aee ste 317 436 TIE Wink Time Out Assignment sess enses 318 43 7 Outside to TIE Transfer dett edente edi EORR 320 438 TIE to Outside Transfer eese nnne a ne nennen ener nn ne 321 439 TTE to TIE Transter 5 edere RI Gee E RUE a e ci hess hte 322 440 LIE Securnty Type 1 2 t eR EE reb eie teet E HER beet 323 442 Voice Path Type uc ie t eiie edlen 324 443 Voice Level Transmit 2 11e Ime dene eese ie a ai eee 325 444 Voice Level Receive n ecce tee eet eet eter pet eie ann esten eerte dare 326 445 TIE Receive Dial 2 eter ee eter eee eee tee eti eed 327 45 Resource Programming niter ite cene ce t Fee redit eee o Pise el epe r sheer o iones N KES 328 GTI DISA TIE User Codes 3 ei ee Sh a tet diete t ec Eee HE 204 4 6 Optional Programming eee eee eee eene eee ene see tn aset epos etta aset eaae set ea esee eaae ee ep eset eaa 330 990 System Additional Information eese eene 213 5 DECT Prosrammilng c ocio reet atto ceri eaonon ss Nor sa arr eeasap uei JAL 5 1 Manager Programming eese eene eee eee eee en neon sese tbe sesta ae t
104. KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 Analogue Proprietary Telephone APT KX T7330 KX T7130 KX T7030 KX T7033 Extensions Used for Programming Connect one of the above mentioned telephone sets to either of the following Jack number 1 Jack programmed as a manager extension To assign the manager extension see Section 2 1 006 Op erator Manager Extension Assignment User Programming Manager Programming Manager programming items are allowed for any display proprietary telephone user in the system See Section 1 5 User Programming Mode 10 Programming Instructions 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display DPT Three soft buttons are provided just below the display of Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT KX T7533 KX T7536 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7230 and KX T7235 The functions of these soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance step by step Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower line of the display See Viewing the Display in this section for more information on the display lines If the SHIFT button indicator is on two functions are available with each softbutton To alternate between the two functions press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display Soft button variations lt gri e CLR NEXT Softl Soft 2 Soft 3
105. LEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of 32 names for KX TD816 and 128 names for KX TD1232 Each name has a maximum of 10 characters 36 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods Features Guide References Call Directory Display Message Intercom Calling General Programming 37 2 1 Manager Programming 005 F Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on proprietary telephones from a centralised telephone Selection Jack number lexible CO Button Assignment KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Button Code plus parameter if required Button Code Parameter 0 Single CO KX TD816 01 through 08 Outside line number KX TD1232 01 through 54 Outside line number 1 DSS 2 through 4 digits Extension number 2 One Touch Dialling 16 digits max Telephone number 3 Message Waiting None 4 FWD DND None 5 Save None 6 Account None 7 Conference None 80 Log In Log Out None 82 Vo
106. Night None X Loop CO None 228 ISDN Programming 3 1 Manager Programming Button Code Parameter Group CO CO Ringer frequency 1 through 8 Ring tone type number 1 through 8 Outside line group number Available when this system is connected toa Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP200 Default KX TD816 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 Single CO 01 through 08 Ring tone type 2 Other CO buttons Not stored KX TD1232 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 24 Single CO 01 through 24 Ring tone type 2 Programming 1 Enter 005 Display Flexible Key Asn Press NEXT Display Jack NO Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display PT PGM Mode Press the CO button which is changed to another button The display shows the contents pre assigned to the button Display example CO 01 Enter a button code plus parameter if required To change the parameter press CLEAR and enter the new parameter Press STORE To programme another CO button of the same jack repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another jack press SELECT and repeat steps 3 through 6 Press END Cancelling 1 2 3 4 Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above Enter 2 Press STORE Press END ISDN Programming 229 3 1 Manager Programming Cond
107. Not stored 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 178 KX TD1232 165 through 180 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 199 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 199 291 through 294 296 through 299 Features Guide References Digital Wireless Connection DECT Programming 353 5 3 Extension Programming 651 P S Termination Description Deletes a stored PS so that it cannot be used in the system Selection PSregistration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Default Not applicable Programming 1 Enter 651 Display PS Termination 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 EXT 281 4 Press STORE Display Executing The system searches for the PS registration number while Executing is blinking and deletes the registration after it is found Display example Deleted 5 To delete another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Even if Rejected is displayed in step 4 above you can delete the PS In this case Registration Clear on the PS PS Programming is required 1 Enter 651 Display PS Termination 2 Press NEXT Disp
108. Overlay A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory This overlay should be used at all times while in programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change while in programming mode as follows The original functions are in parentheses During Normal Operation During Programming PAUSE PAUSE PROGRAM SP PHONE NEXT REDIAL PREV PREVIOUS AUTO ANSWER MUTE SELECT FLASH FLASH TRANSFER CLEAR FWD DND T CONF n INTERCOM SECRET AUTO DIAL STORE STORE HOLD END 12 Programming Instructions 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones Location of Controls with the Overlay The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the proprietary telephone while in programming mode There are Overlays for the KX T7500 KX T7400 and KX T7200 series telephones KX T7536 and KX T7230 are used for the examples Panasonic 5 56 FLASH PAUSE CLEAR 10217 2ABC 3DEF 2 4GHI SIKL SMNO j H E B ala aa aa 7PORS BTUV SWXVZ Cx JL o n SELECT STORE 868888889 KX T7536 KX T7436 Panasonic KX T7230 Programming Instructions 13 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones Viewing the Display The display gives you helpful information such as wha
109. Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System Programming Guide KX TD816 we KX TD1232 Please read this manual before using the Digital Super Hybrid System This manual is for software version P3411 P3421 or later for KX TD816 and P2411 P2421 or later for KX TD1232 Introduction About this Programming Guide This Programming Guide is designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD816 KX TD1232 This manual contains the following sections Section 1 Programming Instructions Provides information about what you need or what you should do before during programming Section 2 General Programming Provides details about the general system programmings Section 3 ISDN Programming Provides details about the system programmings required to use ISDN lines The system is in accordance with European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications below ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP supplementary service ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR supplementary service ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP supplementary service ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR supplementary service ETS 300 122 Generic keypad protocol for the support of supplementary service ISDN Service Access ETS 300 130 Maliciou
110. Programming 191 2 8 Resource Programming Features Guide References Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 192 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 801 SMDR Format Description Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the printer Page length determines the number of lines per page Skip perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page Selection Pagelength lines 4 through 99 Skip perforation lines 0 through 95 Default Page length 66 Skip perforation 0 Programming 1 Enter 801 Display SMDR Format 2 Press NEXT to programme page length Display example Page Length 606 3 Enter the page length To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new page length 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to programme skip perforation Display example Skip Perf 0 6 Enter the skip perforation To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new skip perforation 7 Press STORE 8 Press END Conditions The page length should be four lines or more longer than the skip perforation length Atitle is positioned on the first three lines on every page The programmed format becomes valid only if the Serial Interface RS 232C cable is connected If a printer is already connected disconnect it and connect again Otherwise the former format becomes valid Features Guide References Station Message Detail Record
111. Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions Afloating number is composed of two through four numerical digits 0 through 9 The first one or two digits of the floating numbers are subject to programme 10 O Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks Floating numbers and extension numbers should be different Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and General Programming 207 2 8 Resource Programming 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 through 264 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 178 KX TD1232 165 through 180 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored 671 PS Extension Number Set Not stored You cannot leave an entry empty Floating numbers of extension groups are available for the Uniform Call Distribution UCD and Ring Group features Features Guide References Floating Station 208 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 814 Modem Standard Description Assigns the modem standard There are two standards available BELL and CCITT Selection BELL CCITT
112. TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT Display example Master C E Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press SP rogramme Area 2 if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area 2 is displayed Press STORE Press END NADANA U KX TD1232 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT to programme the Master System To programme Slave press NEXT again ISDN Programming 241 3 2 System Programming NADANA U 9 Display example Master C E1 E2 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press gt rogramme another Area if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area is displayed Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are completed Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 10 Press NEXT to programme the Slave System Display example Slave C E1 E2 Repeat steps 3 through 7 if required 10 Press END Conditions The following units can be installed in the slots C 4 CO lines KX TD180 1 2 ISDN SO lines KX TD280 S2 6 ISDN SO lines KX TD286 S3 I PRIISDN line KX TD290 EM 4 E amp M lines KX TD184 E E1 E2 8 Extension lines KX TD170 KX TD144 or KX TD146 A Al A2 16 SLT lines KX TD174
113. TIE table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty You must confirm with your central office regarding the number of digits being sent Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service 316 E amp M Programming 44 TIE Line Programming 435 TIE Added Number Description Assigns the added number to the TIE subscriber number which is determined in programme 43 4 TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit This makes the final number which serves as the extension number Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the number Selection TIE table number 1 through 4 Number to be added 4 digits max Default All TIE tables Blank Programming 1 Enter 435 Display TIE Add Dial 2 Press NEXT Display Table NO 3 Enter a TIE table number To enter TIE table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 4 Enter the number to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another TIE table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired TIE table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Each added number has a maximum of four digits consisting of 0 through 9 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 317 44 TIE Line Programming 4369 T IEWink Time Out Assignment Descri
114. There are two expansion areas in the KX TD816 areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top One extension line unit and one outside line CO ISDN SO E amp M unit can be installed There are three expansion areas in each system for the KX TD1232 areas 1 2 and 3 fro bottom to top Up to two extension line units and one outside line CO ISDN S0 E amp M unit can be installed The PRI ISDN line unit can be installed with the ISDN SO line unit but not with the analogue outside line unit An out of service system is unassignable In this case skip steps 8 and 9 for the KX TD1232 For the KX TD1232 if only the Slave System is in operation the display shows Slave in step 2 After changing the setting turn the Power Switch off and on once Otherwise the previous setting will remain Features Guide References None 242 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming 112 ISDN Network Type Assignment Description Assigns the type of ISDN network Selection ISDN network mode 000 through 255 Default Mode 8 Programming 1 Enter 112 Display Network Type 2 Press NEXT Display example Mode 8 3 Enter an ISDN network mode To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new network mode 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 243 3 2 System Programming 150 D DI Translation Table Descrip
115. Time 110 221 293 306 338 391 Intercept Extension Day Night 148 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 105 148 219 291 336 389 Intercept Time 105 Intercom dial tone frequency 216 288 333 386 Inter digit pause for pulse dialling 216 288 333 386 IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer 105 148 219 291 336 389 ISDN Class of Service 277 ISDN Configuration 258 ISDN Data Link Mode 260 ISDN DDI MSN Removed Digit Added Number Assignment 252 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number 264 ISDN Extension Name Set 233 ISDN Extension Number Set 231 ISDN Extension Progress Tone 266 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode 256 ISDN Line Number Assignment 248 ISDN Network Type Assignment 243 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment 250 410 Index ISDN Port Type 254 ISDN Ring Service Assignment Day Night 275 ISDN Service button 38 228 ISDN TEI Mode 262 J Jack number 15 Jog Dial 16 K KX TD144 70 242 303 349 KX TD146 70 242 303 349 KX TD170 70 242 303 349 KX TD180 70 242 303 349 KX TD184 70 242 303 349 KX TD194 96 100 KX TD197 Baud Rate Set 211 KX TD280 70 242 303 349 KX TD286 70 242 303 349 KX TD290 70 137 139 156 242 249 272 273 303 349 L Line Hunting Sequence 160 Live Call Screening button 38 228 Live Call Screening Cancel button 38 228 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment 189 Log In Log Out button 38 228 Loop CO button 38 60
116. X TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part Charge limitation Charge 0 through 59999 Default All jacks 0 Programming 1 Enter 010 Display Charge Limit 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 401 1 0 4 Enter a charge limitation To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions If the charge limitation is set 0 no restriction is applied e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Toassign all jack numbers to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 General Programming 49 2 1 Manager Programming The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by 121 Assignment of Denomination Features Guide References Budget Management Charge Fee Reference 50 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 011 Charge Margin Rate Description Assigns the margin rate of a telephone charge Selection Margin 46 0 through 999 Default 0 Programming 1 Enter 011 Display Charge Margin 2 Press NEXT Display Margin 0 3 Enter a
117. able Programming 1 Enter 505 Display Busy Override 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Executive Busy Override General Programming 167 2 6 COS Programming 506 E xecutive Busy Override Deny Description This programme is used to determine which Classes of Services COS are allowed to den Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Deny allows the user to prevent Executive Busy Override from being executed by another extension user Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Disable Enable Default All COS Enable Programming 1 Enter 506 Display Busy Over Deny 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 t
118. alid FWD VM RBT FWD to VM ringback tone Not available reserved FWD VM BT FWD to VM busy tone This is sent when the called extension has set Call Forwarding to VPS FWD EXT RBT FWD to extension ringback tone Not available reserved Selection e RBT BT ROT DND Answer Disconnect Confirm FWD VM RBT FWD VM BT FWD EXT RBT DTMF signal number 3 digits max Default RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 Programming 1 Enter 113 Display VM Status Set 2 Press NEXT to programme ringback tone status To programme another status keep pressing NEXT until the desired status is displayed General Programming 71 2 2 System Programming Display example RBT 1 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed Repeat steps 3 through 5 Press END Conditions A DTMF signal number can have a maximum of three digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE The DTMF signals are sent to the extensions in the extension group that is assigned as VM or AA in programme 106 Station Hunting Type Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Inband 72 General Programming
119. alled The bits 4 3 2 and 1 shown below is used to enter your selection 2 Enables or disables Call Forwarding Follow Me feature on a COS basis The bit 5 below is used to enter your selection Display Example Bit Number 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1111 1111111 0 0 0 0 unused 2 1 Selection COS number 1 through 8 all COS Selection for bits 4 3 2 and 1 0000 no limit 0001 1 digit 0010 2 digits 0011 3 digits 0100 4 digits 0101 5 digits 0110 6 digits 0111 7 digits 1000 8 digits 1001 9 digits 1010 10 digits 1011 11 digits 1100 12 digits 1101 13 digits 1110 14 digits 1111 15 digits Selection for bit 5 0 disable 1 enable Default Bits 4 3 2 and 1 All COS 0000 Bit 5 All COS 1 Programming 1 Enter 991 Display COS Add Inf 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number Display example 1111111111110000 4 Keep pressing mto n t the cursor to the desired bit 5 Enter your selection 0 or 1 224 General Programming 2 9 Optional Programming To change the current entry press STORE and the new selection 6 To programme another bit repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another COS press SELECT and the desired COS number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions None Features Guide Re
120. and the desired voice mail number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Forthe KX TD1232 VM 01 through VM 08 are for the Master System and VM 09 through VM 16 are for the Slave System if available The display shows VM XX YY 1 EXG Z in step 3 XX means a voice mail number YY means the jack number of the voice mail port General Programming 8l 2 2 System Programming programmed in 1 17 Voice Mail Number Assignment of YY 1 means the first part of the jack number in digital line Y Y 2 means the second part of the jack number in digital line e To assign all voice mail numbers to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for voice mail number 01 Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 82 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 120 Charge Display Selection Description Assigns the initial display format of charge fee Selection in Meter in Charge Default in Meter Programming 1 Enter 120 Display Charge Meter 2 Press NEXT Display example in Meter 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 5 Press END A Conditions e This programming is only effective when you select for charge SMDR Output by programme 815 SMDR Output Mode e This programming will also determine the print out format
121. are for the Slave if available e Assignable extension numbers are programmed in the following programmes Extension numbers 0 03 Extension Number Set ISDN extension numbers 01 2 ISDN Extension Number Set Voice Mail extension numbers 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Phantom extension numbers 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Floating numbers 8 13 Floating Number Assignment PS extension number 6 7 1 PS Extension Number Set Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN Ringing Service ISDN Programming 271 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 450 P RI Configuration Description Assigns the number of B channels which are actually used out of the 30 PRI line channels The CRC4 mode can be also assigned This programme is only available for the KX TD1232 with the Primary Rate Interface ISDN Expansion Unit KX TD290 Selection Bchannel number 0 through 30 e CRC4 Disable Enable Default B channel number 0 line CRC4 Enable Programming 1 Enter 450 Display PRI Config 2 Press NEXT Display example Use 0 Line 3 Enter the number of B channels 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to assign the CRC4 mode Display example CRC4 Enable 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 7 Press STORE 8 Press END Conditions If the available number of B channels are not assigned as 0 Line outside lines
122. as 1 2 C 4 CO S1 2 S0 S2 6 S0 EM 4 E amp M E EXT A 16 SLT D No Use KX TD1232 Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 C 4 CO S1 2 S0 S2 6 S0 S3 1 PRI EM 4 E amp M E1 8 EXT1 E2 8 EXT2 Al 16 SLTI A2 16 SLT2 D No Use Master system only S3 E1 and E2 for the KX TD144 or KX TD146 Default KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT Display example Master C E Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press WiP rogramme Area 2 if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area 2 is displayed Press STORE Press END IAN Ww KX TD123 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT to programme the Master System To programme Slave press NEXT again 302 E amp M Programming 4 1 System Programming NA UR WwW 9 Display example Master C E1 E2 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press mrogramme another Area if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area is displayed Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are completed Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 10 Press NEXT to programme the Slave System Display example Slave C E1 E2 Repeat steps 3 through 7 if required
123. as 10 Using Proprietary Telephones 4 cere esee eerte eee teen eee etes etta tese to so eet eae sese ena 11 Programming Methods c ccccssscsssescseseccsssosscessescsesesessessscesseceveseecssoosscssoensseseeseseossoes 15 Entering Characters fitscccccciecccecsssesdcccteedcsscveccsctveseectvncesstecscentectusagectosasecedsesscesterecsccavece 17 User Programming Mod e csscssccsssssscsssssccsssscscsssscscssssesssscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssecees 22 Programming Example cccsccsssscssssscssssssssscsscssssscsssssssssssssscsssssscsssccscessscsssssscsens 23 2 General Programming eoes ence rene eoe dee seco cea pn een tear sees 22 407 2 1 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 015 2 100 101 102 Manager Programmllip 2 eieeece ee ete ene soo rasno coc eto eriein ER ene pre e eEE Prope Ee eee CEP Sepe 28 Date and Time Set x nt pm epe 28 System Speed Dialling Number Set 30 System Speed Dialling Name Set eese rennen 32 Extension Number Set eee eed eee Lee eee ie eda Dele ne 34 Extension Name Sete seere aparsa e er eie ie ete iiti 36 Flexible CO Button Assignment eseeeeseeseeseeeeeee eene enne 38 Operator Manager Extension Assignment sese ene 41 Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment eere 43 Absent MESSA ES deed e De Feat eii
124. ature numbers except selections 01 through 16 Toclear an extension block 01 through 16 it is required to change the corresponding numbers assigned in programmes 003 Ext ension Number Set 12 ISD N Extension Number Set 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set 130 P hantom Extension Number Set 813 Fl oating Number Assignment and 671 PS Ext ension Number Set Features Guide References Flexible Numbering DECT Programming 347 5 2 System Programming 109 E xpansion Unit Type Description Assigns the type of expansion units to be used in the system This allows the system to identify the unit in each expansion unit location Selection KX TD816 e Areas 1 2 C 4 CO S1 2 S0 S2 6 S0 EM 4 E amp M E EXT A 16 SLT D No Use KX TD1232 Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 C 4 CO S1 2 S0 S2 6 S0 S3 1 PRI EM 4 E amp M E1 8 EXT1 E2 8 EXT2 Al 16 SLTI A2 16 SLT2 D No Use Master system only S3 E1 and E2 for the KX TD144 or KX TD146 Default KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT Display example Master C E Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press WiP rogramme Area 2 if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area 2 is displayed Press STORE Press END IAN Ww KX TD123
125. ault All UCD groups Not stored Programming 1 Enter 126 Display UCD Overflow 2 Press NEXT Display UCD NO 3 Enter a UCD group numbe To enter UCD group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example UCD1 TT 4 Enter an overflow extension numbe Display example UCD1 102 TT 5 Press gt 6 Enter a Time Table numbe Display example UCD1 102 TT 1 7 Press STORE 8 Press END Conditions If the overflow extension or Time Table number is not assigned the system will not answer the call and waits for any extension to become idle In this case Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA will be employed General Programming 89 2 2 System Programming Features Guide References Uniform Call Distribution UCD 90 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 127 UCD Time Table Description Assigns the queuing sequence in the Uniform Call Distribution UCD Time Table The queuing sequences are as follows S1 Sends DISA Direct Inward System Access outgoing message 1 S2 Sends DISA outgoing message 2 S3 Sends DISA outgoing message 3 S4 Sends DISA outgoing message 4 TR Transfers to the overflow extension RT Returns to the top of the sequence Blank Disconnects 1T Timer 16 seconds 2T Timer 32 seconds 3T Timer 48 seconds 4T Timer 64 seconds Selection Default Time Table number 1 through 4 8 1 82 83 SA TR RT
126. ault All ports All outside lines Enabl Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 614 for day or 615 for night Display example CO Out ISDN Day 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 401 CO01 Enabl 4 Enter the desired outside line number or keep pressing I gt nti m desired outside line is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END ISDN Programming 279 3 4 Extension Programming Conditions Forthe KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available Toassign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 Toassign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 4 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 When you change a port number by pressing NEXT or PREV the outside line number is not changed Example 03 CO02 Pressing NEXT 04 CO02 Features Guide References Night Service Outside Line Connection Assignment Outgoing 280 ISDN Programming 3 4
127. ay FLX Numbering 2 Press NEXT Display Select NO 3 Enter a selection number To enter selection number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 EXT BL 1 4 Enter the feature number To delete the feature number press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another selection press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired selection number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers 01 through 16 1st through 16th extension blocks 1 Enter 100 2 Press NEXT 3 Enter 00 Display All Feature CLR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Required digits and valid entries for the feature numbers are as follows ISDN Programming 239 3 2 System Programming Features Guide References Feature number type Required digits Valid entry Extension blocks other ui PBX extensions 1 or 2 digits 0 through 9 TIE line access number 1 through 3 digits 0 through 9 Other feature numbers 1 through 3 digits 0 through 9 x tis possible to assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective extension blocks Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programmes 00 3 Extension Number Set 0 Extension Number Set 130 Assignment and 671 PS 12 ISDN Extension Number Set 11 Phantom Extension Number Set
128. bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer Selection e New line code CR LF CR CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed Baudrate baud 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 Word length bits 7 8 e Parity bit None Mark Space Even Odd Stop bit length bits 1 2 Default Port 1 Port 2 New line code CR LF Baud rate 9600 Word length 8 Parity bit Mark Stop bit 1 Programming 1 Enter a programme address 806 for Port 1 or 807 for Port 2 Display example RS232C Paramet 1 2 Press NEXT to programme new line code Display example NL Code CR LF 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to programme baud rate 200 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming Display example Baud Rate 9600 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 7 Press STORE 8 Press NEXT to programme word length Display example Word Lengt 8bits 9 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 10 Press STORE 11 Press NEXT to programme parity bit Display example Parity Mark 12 Keep pressing SELEC until the desired selection is displayed 13 Press STORE 14 Press NEXT to programme stop bit Display example Stop Bit lbit 15 Keep pressing SELEC until the desired selection is
129. box number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for KX TD1232 for connection toa Voice Processing System as theVoice Mail or Automated Attendant ports e Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and PAUSE DECT Programming 371 5 3 Extension Programming e To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the display press wi lt Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Inband 372 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 671 PS Extension Number Set Description Assigns an extension number to each PS Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e PS extension number 2 through 4 digits Default All PSs Not stored Programming 1 Enter 671 Display PS EXT NO SET 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Not Stored 4 Enter the PS extension number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the curren
130. case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by programme 12 1 Assignment of Denomination 358 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming Features Guide References Budget Management Charge Fee Reference DECT Programming 359 5 3 Extension Programming 656 P S Charge Verification Assignment Description Assigns the PS which is allowed to refer or clear the charge information on the extension outside line account code and total Selection PSregistration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all PS registration numbers Enable Disable Default All PSs Enable Programming 1 Enter 656 Display PS Charge Refer 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration numbe 7 Press END Un Conditions e To assign all PSs to one selection press the Xey in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number Features Guide References Charge Fee Referen
131. cator lights red and a confirmation tone is emitted Confirmation tone one beep After pressing STORE you will hear a beep This informs you that storage is completed Alarm tone three beeps If you hear this alarm your entry is not valid Making another selection within the same programme address To make the next higher selection press NEXT To make the previous selection press PREV To make a specific selection press SELECT and then enter the number Programming Instructions 15 1 3 Programming Methods Going to another programme address After pressing STORE you can go to another programme with either of the following two methods a To go to the next larger programme address Press Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME v DOWN or rorate the Jog Dial in the counter clockwise direction To go to the next smaller programme address Press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME UP or rorate the Jog Dial in the clockwise direction b To go to a specific programme address Press END then enter the programme Address Method 1 is useful when you want to perform a series of programmes consecutively For example to change the programming in addresses OX X use this method You can move from 000 to 001 from 001 to 002 and so on by pressing the SKP or VOLUME vV You can move in reverse order from 008 to 007 etc by pressing the SKP or VOLUMEA This method can also be used to move between neighboring programme g
132. ce 360 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 657 PS Class of Service Description Programmes each PS a Class of Service COS The COS determines the call handling abilities for each PS Primary and secondary COS numbers can be assigned for each PS Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all PS registration numbers COS number 1 through 8 Default All PSs Primary Secondary COS 1 COS 1 Programming 1 Enter 657 Display PS COS Assign 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS0O1 COS1 COS 4 Enter a primary COS numbe To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press m 6 Enter a secondary COS numbe To change the current entry enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of eight Classes of Service Every PS must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to COS Programming in programmes 5X X and 991 DECT Programming 361 5 3 Extension Programming To assign all PSs to one COS press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which
133. ceseseeesesesestetsseaes 185 612 Incoming Call Display reete de Get ce ee ee RO 187 616 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment eee 189 2 8 Resource ProgramMing ccscccccccsssssccssseccsssscccsssscssssesesssssscsssssssssssssssssscssssssssseses 191 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout eee eeceeeeeeeeneceneeeeeeneeeseeees 191 S01 cZSMIRBEEORBat ot ride tarot tere EE PEG Vh eoe T RANT Ee Prec chad casavasecsebaagusdetasates 193 802 System Data Printout 2 ene poe ete eee Phe re He tpe EU e HARE ARCU Euh 194 803 Music Source Use eure eoe ere ade n er predi dt v ERE 195 804 External Pager BGM 25 ee eee ere et eere eth testi i ere eee ie 197 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone esses ener nnne 199 806 807 Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters essen 200 809 DISA Security Type niente tete eer erit te te perpe te 202 810 DISA Tone Detect Ons eee ie itte dee tees 203 ISTE DISA TIE Wiser Codes ret rette ro toe eere Ter etur Pereira 204 812 DISA DTMB Repeat erre nee tree e tete en en eva Eee 206 813 Floating Number Assignment nennen ennt 207 814 Medem sStandard i eiie eec eto et prse reote e eis 209 815 SMDR Output Mode i ite ete e eee tee ete e eire eis ce deed 210 817 KX TD197 Baud Rate Set reunan an i aa SEEE E a a 211 818 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number seeeeeeeee nnne 212 2
134. ction Time seconds 3 through 120 X 10 is the actual time Default 60 s Programming 1 Enter 210 Display Interval Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 60 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Youenter a number from 3 through 120 The actual time is 10 times your input Programme 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times is used to set the number of times Automatic Redial is tried e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Redial 112 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 211 Dial Start Time Description Sets the number of milliseconds the system waits before dialling after an outside line is seised Selection Time milliseconds 0 through 40 7X 100 is the actual time Default 500 ms Programming 1 Enter 211 Display CO Dial Start 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 500 msec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions You enter a number from 0 through 40 The actual time is a 100 times your input You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Outside Line Access General Programming 113 2 3 Timer Programming 212 C all Duration Count Start Time Description Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of diall
135. ction press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Call Transfer General Programming 165 2 6 COS Programming 504 C all Forwarding to Outside Line Description This programme determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform the Call Forwarding to Outside Line function Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Disable Enable Default AII COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 504 Display Call FWD to CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Toassign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Call Forwarding 166 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 505 Executive Busy Override Description Determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override allows the user to interrupt an established call Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Disable Enable Default AII COS Dis
136. d 682 Radio Information Data Clear Not applicable 990 System Additional Information See Default shown in the explanation table 406 Default Values DefaultValues 407 Index Section 7 Index 408 Index A AA Automated Attendant 121 217 289 334 387 AA hunting 65 AA Service 73 219 291 336 389 Absent Messages 45 Account button 38 228 342 Account code 31 63 219 291 336 389 Account Code Entry 63 Account Code Entry Mode 170 Adjust Time 75 Alarm tone 15 Alert button 38 228 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 130 ARS Mode 127 ARS Modify Added Number 135 ARS Modify Removed Digit 134 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 132 ARS Time 128 ARS with DTMF 220 292 337 390 Assignment of Denomination 84 Automated Attendant AA 121 217 289 334 387 Automated Attendant AA Service 73 219 291 336 389 Automatic Access Outside Line Group Assignment 60 Automatic Line Access 60 Automatic Redial Interval Time 112 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 111 Automatic time adjustment 221 293 338 391 B Background Music BGM 195 197 220 292 337 390 Bearer 221 222 293 294 338 339 391 392 BGM Background Music 195 197 220 292 337 390 Budget Management 49 235 358 Budget Management on ISDN Port 235 C Call blocking mode 140 142 Call Duration Count Start Time 114 Call Forwarding 104
137. d assigns whether Transfer extension Recall occurs at the transfer initiating 1 Operator 1 extension or at Operator 1 2 If the restriction of outside call duration 0 both calls 0 None is enabled in programme 1 outgoing calls 502 E xtension to Outside Line Call only Duration Limit assigns if the restriction is done for both outgoing and incoming calls or for outgoing calls only 3 _ Allows you to remove confirmation tone 0 disable 1 Confirmation 4 By default a beep tone sounds when 1 enable Tone a three party conference is started ended 4 Determines if the dialled X and 0 no check 1 Toll Restriction will be checked byToll Restriction This 1 check assignment is required for certain central offices CO to prevent toll fraud Some COs ignore the user dialled X and f If your CO is such a type select 0 no check 5 Enables or disables the Flash function 0 disable 0 Flash when an outside call is received at a 1 enable locked or toll restricted station Flash if enabled allows the user to make an outside call using the same line If 0 disconnection signal is selected in Area 01 bit 3 above this 1s also allowed for those extensions that have the Account Code Verified All Calls mode assigned 6 Allows you to remove confirmation tone 0 disable 1 Confirmation 3 This tone is sent when a conversation 1 enable Tone ISDN Programming 287 3 5 Optional Progra
138. d selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another port press SELECT and the desired port numbe Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END oc NADANA Conditions This assignment depends on the contract with your ISDN supplier e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available To assign all ports to the same number press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDI ISDN Programming 275 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN Ringing Service 276 ISDN Programming 3 4 Extension Programming 3 4 Extension Programming 613 ISDN Class of Service Description Programmes a Class of Service COS number for each ISDN extension port The COS determines the call handling abilities of each port A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assiged per port Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports COS number 1 through 8 Default All ports Primary Secondary COS 1 COS 1 Programming 1 Enter 613 Display ISDN COS Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 COS1 COSI 4 Enter a primary COS number To change the current entry
139. d to the system 9XX Optional Programming Used to answer the user s requirements or troubles if needed Programming Instructions 25 1 6 Programming Example 26 Programming Instructions Section General Programming General Programming 27 2 1 Manager Programming 2 Manager Programming 000 D ate and Time Set Description Sets the current date and time Selection Default Year 00 through 99 Month Jan through Dec Day 1 through 31 Day of the week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Hour 00 through 23 Minute 00 through 59 AM PM 05 Jan 1 SUN 00 00 Programming 1 SN UA 8 9 Enter 000 Display Day Time set Press NEXT Display example 95 Jan 1 SUN Enter the year To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new year Press m Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed Press a gt Enter the day To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new day Press wp Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is displayed 10 Press STORE 11 Press NEXT Display example 12 00 PM 12 Enter the hour 28 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new hour 13 Press m 14 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new minute 15 Press mw 16 Pres
140. dial tone 0 disable 1 None between obtaining an outside line and 1 enable dialling the phone number when using the one touch dial redial or speed dial function 9 Result of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly single line telephones only Hold Hold 1 disconnection 10 Sets the duration of the DTMF signals 0 80 ms 0 Voice Mail sent to the VPS ports 1 160 ms Integration 12 11 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals such as a 01 1 0s Integration mailbox number to the VPS after the 10 1 5s VPS answers a call 11 2 0s 14 13 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals programmed in 01 1 0 s Integration 113 to VPS after the VPS calls an 2 10 1 5s extension 11 2 0s 15 Assigns whether the system or the VPS 0 system 0 Message turns off the Message Waiting lamp 1 VPS Waiting when the user hears a message recorded Voice Mail in a mailbox Integration 16 Reserved E amp M Programming 331 4 6 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 02 If an outside party is transferred and unanswered assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer initiating extension or at Operator 1 0 initiating extension 1 Operator 1 Call Transfer If the restriction of outside call duration is enabled in program
141. displayed 16 Press STORE 17 Press END Conditions e The following combinations are invalid Parity Word Length Stop Bit Mark 8 2 Space 8 1 Space 8 2 The programme address of the out of service system port is unacceptable Features Guide References Station Message Detail Recording SMDR General Programming 201 2 8 Resource Programming 809 D ISA Security Type Description Assigns the security mode for outside calls attempted by the DISA Direct Inward System Access caller There are two modes Non Security and Trunk Security outside line security Non Security mode allows the caller to access an outside line without dialling a DISA user code Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a DISA User Code before making an outside call Selection Non non security Trunk trunk security Default Trunk Programming 1 Enter 809 Display DISA Security 2 Press NEXT Display example Security Trunk 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Programme 811 DISA TIE User Codes is used to programme DISA User Codes Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA 202 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 810 DISA Tone Detection Description Enables or disables Tone Detection for outside to outside line calls via the Direct Inward System Access DISA
142. e 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions After programmed you must reset your system To assign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the jack 01 Features Guide References Super EXtra Device Port SXDP DECT Programming 357 5 3 Extension Programming 655 P S Budget Management Description Assigns the charge limitation for a call on a PS basis Selection PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all PS registration numbers Charge limitation 0 through 59999 Default All PSs 0 Programming 1 Enter 655 Display PS Charge Limit 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 0 4 Enter a charge limit To delete the charge limit press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Ifthe charge limit is set 0 no restriction is applied e To assign all PSs to one selection press the Xey in step 3 In this
143. e is selected the Hotel menu is displayed on the operator extension s KX T7536 or KX T7235 Features Guide References Hotel Application General Programming 87 2 2 System Programming 125 U ser Password Description Assigns the password required for entering the User Programming mode In the User Programming mode any display digital proprietary telephone user in the system can set the Manager Programmings Programme address OXX Selection Password 4 through 7 digits Default 1234 Programming 1 Enter 125 Display User Password 2 Press NEXT Display example Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new password Press STORE Press END Un A Conditions The password can be from four to seven digits long consisting of 0 through 9 e If less than four digits are entered they will not be stored e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References System Programming with Proprietary Telephone 88 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 126 UCD Overflow Description Assigns the destination where the call is transferred to when all extensions in the Uniform Call Distribution UCD group are busy The Time Table number of the overflow extension must also be assigned Selection e UCD group number 1 through 8 Overflow extension number 2 through 4 digits Time Table number 1 through 4 Def
144. e 83 Assignment of Denomination eese nennen enne nen nennen nre 84 Charge Verification Assignment esee nennen nennen 85 Charge Verification ID Code Set essere 86 Hotel Application o eai pet t ane e tides 87 Table of Contents 12 S User Pass WOFd air T Ee T eiie annui 88 12 OWED Overflow e e ERR et e E aE 89 12 TIU ED ime Table eer Ret ie iet teat em roi ete p ehe e Rees 91 13 O Phantom Extension Number Set essen eene ener enne 93 14 S Off Hook MOTItOE idet ro ms ette e eI enr eh ete eb ende 95 15 4 Message Waiting Control sees eren eerte nennen nennen nnns 96 15 5 Message Waiting Lamp Assignment essent 98 15 6 Message Waiting Port Set nci ceste nete debite dese teer hee hebr eei soto 100 23 Timer Programming seen ito tote to coe eye ee so rae e Ep boo Cer Dy Deae a eoo boe Ee GeV re eoe ele Hebreo e 102 20 0 Hold Recall Dime tee rte eter eerte eee iret ete reel ns 102 20 l Transfer Recall imet tese recen er ete ret ei 103 20 2 Call Forwarding No Answer Time eese enne enne 104 20 3 Intercept Time 25 nre etit eene ete te tee tese gie A tee Sie toit 105 20 4 Pickup Dial Waiting Time enne ennt 106 20 S Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Time een 107 20 6 Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time seeeeeeeeeenenee 108 20
145. e Dette ep oe i EEEE 45 Emergency Dial Number Seto cecceseeesecesesseeeeeeseeeeeesaesaeceaeeaaeseceaeeeaeeneeeaes 47 B dget Management htt D nce eee Ede e oe het eris 49 Charge Margin R te eee ete rice rt eret re ates ite 51 Quick Dialling Number Set sissies teet eerte eee cuit testae tienne tea 52 System Programming ier bese ete sunseosacdanssvedsessocdsnscosnacscossadsnesdacssdelscsecedesccvessdesessss 53 Flexible Numbe ting eI ee CGU ecu 53 Day Night Service Switching Mode seen 57 Day Night Service Starting Time sese 58 Automatic Access Outside Line Group Assignment esee 60 Flexible Quick Dialling Number Set eene 61 Account GOES zitierter eet te dete c e e eee tede a 63 Station Hunting Type 5 n nme Y E ER e Pete ee et Li pe Pedo eec 65 System Password ioter e HR t dr de iue ebore bes 67 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button esee 68 Expansion Unit Type inet dete teet tios 69 VM Stats DIME Set eite t titer ep tae tee RE T AT 71 VM Command DTME Set e bene iet eee Maite te aser ene aene 73 Adjust Time dpt repetitum ette 75 ROM Version Display m Ie ee Ue ded eet 76 Voice Mail Number Assignment ei eese eene nennen TI Voice Mail Extension Number Set essere 79 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment essere enne nenne 81 Charge Display Selection 2 een bebe d
146. e MCID service even after the caller hangs up If enabled the call will not be disconnected until you go on hook enable disable Malicious Call Identification MCID 3 16 Reserved Selection Default See Default shown in the explanation table Area code 01 through 08 Selection See Selection in the explanation table Programming 1 Un A o0 1 Enter 990 Display System Add Inf Press NEXT Display Area NO Enter an area code 01 through 08 Display example 0010100011000001 Keep pressing mto n amp the cursor to the desired bit Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and enter the new selection To programme another bit repeat steps 4 and 5 Press STORE To programme another area press SELECT and the desired area code Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END 222 General Programming 2 9 Optional Programming Conditions None Features Guide References None General Programming 223 2 9 Optional Programming 991 C OS Additional Information Description 1 Sets the number of digits allowed to dial out during an analogue outside call on a Class of Service COS basis If an outside party hangs up and the extension user tries to dial out still on the outside line the system will disconnect the line at the time the assigned number of digits are di
147. e deny 733 47 Pickup dialling 74 48 Absent message 750 49 Timed reminder 76 50 Electronic station lockout TI 51 Night service mode 78 52 Parallel telephone mode 39 53 Background music external 35 54 Reserved 55 62 Emergency call 1 through 8 None 63 Timed reminder remote 7 64 Call log incoming 56 65 Call log lock incoming 57 66 Check out ready 736 67 TIE line access number None 68 83 Other PBX Extension 01 through 16 None 84 LCS password set cancel 799 85 Log in log out 45 86 SXDP 48 87 CLIP COLP 711 88 Reserved 89 MCID 731 54 General Programming 2 2 System Programming Selection Selection number 01 through 89 See Feature Number List for the corresponding features Feature number 1 or 2 digits for selection numbers 01 through 16 68 through 83 1 through 3 digits for selection numbers 17 through 67 84 through 89 Default See Feature Number List Programming 1 Enter 100 Display FLX Numbering 2 Press NEXT Display Select NO 3 Enter a selection number To enter selection number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 EXT BL 1 4 Enter the feature number To delete the feature number press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another selection press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired selection number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END
148. e the Call Forwarding has been set incoming outside calls 9 Selects the result when the first digit 0 disconnect 1 None timer or the inter digit timer used for toll 1 do not restriction checking assigned in disconnect programme 207 Fi rst Digit Time or 208 I nter Digit Time expires 10 Enables or disables retry by diall ingx 0 dial X 1 DISA during DISA outside to outside line 1 retry conversation If disabled X will simply be dialled 11 Selects whether the display which is 0 not change 1 Incoming Outside assigned in programme 1 change to Call Information 612 I ncoming Call Display and duration time Display 676 P S Incoming Call Display changes after answering an incoming call or not 12 Selects how long the system keeps the 0 35s 1 Door Opener door opener unlocked 1 5s 13 Enables or disables the automatic time 0 enable 1 ISDN adjustment The time is automatically 1 disable adjusted when the first call after 3 00 AM is received 14 Selects the bearer when using a single 0 Speech 1 ISDN line telephone 1 3 1k Audio General Programming 221 2 9 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 07 15 Selects the bearer when using a proprietary telephone or DECT portable station m 3 1k Audio Speech ISDN 16 Reserved 08 Reserved Enables or disables th
149. e voice mail port is in the VM service mode enable VM service mode disable The mode will change to the AA service mode Only when Inband When the voice mail port is in the AA service mode enable The mode will change to the VM service mode and a Follow On ID is sent disable AA service mode 0 enable 1 disable Voice Mail Integration DECT Programming 389 5 4 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 06 8 Enables or disables sending outside line 0 enable 1 E amp M TIE Line access number 9 to a TIE line When 1 disable Service you dial outside line access number 9 and the outside line is busy the system can automatically send outside line access number 9 to a TIE line so that you can access the outside line through another PBX 9 Enables or disables the ARS with 0 enable 1 ARS DTMF function 1 disable 11 10 Assigns the source of Music Source 1 00 internal music 00 e BGM for Music on Hold and BGM source Music on Hold 01 external music source 11 tone 12 Reserved 13 Enables or disables dial tone 2 when an 0 disable 1 Dial Tone extension sets programmable extension 1 enable Distinctive features such as Call Waiting 14 Enables or disables the Whisper OHCA 0 any telephone 1 Whisper OHCA feature 1 KX T7500 and KX T7400 series telephone only
150. eas in each system for the KX TD1232 areas 1 2 and 3 fro bottom to top Up to two extension line units and one outside line CO ISDN S0 E amp M unit can be installed The PRI ISDN line unit can be installed with the ISDN SO line unit but not with the analogue outside line unit An out of service system is unassignable In this case skip steps 8 and 9 for the KX TD1232 For the KX TD1232 if only the Slave System is in operation the display shows Slave in step 2 After changing the setting turn the Power Switch off and on once Otherwise the previous setting will remain Features Guide References None 70 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 113 VM Status DTMF Set Description Sets the DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals transmitted to your Voice Processing System VPS to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF signals RBT ringback tone This signal is sent when calling an extension BT busy tone This is sent when the called extension is busy ROT reorder tone This is sent when the dialled number is invalid DND DND tone This is sent when the other extension has DND assigned Answer This is sent when the other extension answers the call Disconnect This is sent when the other extension hangs up Confirm confirmation tone This is sent when the feature number for Message Waiting Lamp is v
151. ed Programming 1 Enter 128 Display PBX Code 2 Press NEXT Display Code 3 Enter a PBX Code To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new code 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Valid numbers for the PBX Code are 0 through 9 The PBX Code method is PBX Code Extension number Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service 304 E amp M Programming 4 1 System Programming 129 E amp M Signal Assignment Description Assigns the E amp M signal There are three signals available Continuous Continuous E amp M Wink Immediate Pulsed Ans Pulsed E amp M with Answer Signal Wink only Pulsed No Ans Pulsed E amp M without Answer Signal Wink only Selection Continuous Pulsed Ans Pulsed No Ans Default Continuous Programming 1 Enter 129 Display E amp M Signal 2 Press NEXT Display example Continuous Ge Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions If you select Pulsed Ans or Pulsed No Ans you must select Wink as the start type Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 305 4 2 Timer Programming 4 2 Timer Programming 220 T IE First Inter Digit Time Description Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of the dial tone and the first digit dialled First Digit Time and between digits Inter Digit Time on
152. ed the subscriber s number of your system is informed to the called party Selection Default Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines Enable Disable All outside lines Enable Programming 1 Enter 419 Display ISDN CLIR Send Press NEXT Display CO Line NO Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Enable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Programme 418 ISDN Line Number Assignment is used to store the subscriber s number of your system that is informed to the called party 250 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR ISDN Programming 251 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 421 I SDN DDI MSN Removed Digit Added Number Assignment Description Assigns the removed digi
153. eens see ea ases eaae see eae setas a 342 020 PS Flexible CO Button Assignment ennemi 342 5 2 System Programming ssscssscsesnssessoossvoscsesnss sonsssbessonsesbassseesesuosesnsessonesswsesseaesosseeeesen 344 100 Flexible Numbering zs dete rte tete ie rtr erte Prim PR tete 53 109 Expansion Unit Type ne eee e be treat 69 5 3 Extension Programming e eeteticeeti cese ee eo cese eo eo eo eoo eo Ceo Gor eaae For eaae Sore ssec 350 630 BS RegiSttatIOD enr neret e es Pee eene tank gehe ete e EE eo eae tegat 350 65 1 BS Termination eere Nerei retos rege ies 354 653 PS Extension Name Set 42 dre tete ett ero COT 356 654 SXDP Assignment nese hi Ea E nennen ettet etes ae a ea Aaea 357 655 PS Budget Management seen enne enne E a iai 358 656 PS Charge Verification Assignment esee nennen nee 360 657 PS Class Of Servic E einir ae riirn iecore reto a teet ie cer ba Pedes bapde esas ine era edd 361 658 PS Extension Group Assignment eeeseeseeeeeeeneeen eene nennen nennen 363 659 660 PS DIL 1 N Extension Day Night eese 365 661 662 PS Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night 367 663 664 PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night ees 369 665 PS Voice Mail Access Codes cccccccccssssccecesessceceecessnseecesesessceceecessseseseeceaseesesenes 371 671 PS Extension Numbe
154. eferences Voice Mail Integration for Inband 186 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 612 Incoming Call Display Description Allows you to choose between three display types when an incoming call is received Calling The incoming caller s telephone number is displayed Called The called telephone number is displayed Line Name The outside line name assigned in the program me 417 Outside Line Name Assignment is displayed Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 X KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all jacks Display Types Calling Called CO Line Nam Default AII jacks Calling Programming 1 Enter 612 Display Incoming Display 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Calling 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e To assign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01 General Programming 187 2 7 Extension Programming Features Guide References Display Message I
155. em VPS 71 73 214 216 286 288 331 333 384 386 VOLUME button 16 VPS Voice Processing System 71 73 214 216 286 288 331 333 384 386 W Whisper OHCA 220 292 337 390 X XDP EXtra Device Port 15 35 41 44 173 413 Index 414 This PBX except KX TD816PD fulfills the requirements of following European regulations 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic compatibility Basic EMC Publication 92 31 EEC Electromagnetic compatibility Supplement 93 68 EEC CE mark For above mentioned standards the unit is signed with the CE mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd KME Under the applicable copyright laws this manual may not be reproduced in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of KME Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 2000 Printed in Japan PSQX1999YA KS0100MT1030
156. enable Distinctive features such as Call Waiting 14 Enables or disables the Whisper OHC 0 any telephone 1 Whisper OHCA feature 1 KX T7500 and KX T7400 series telephone only 15 16 Reserved E amp M Programming 337 4 6 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 07 1 3 Reserved 4 Allows to access an outside line has the 0 enable 1 Outside Line lowest number among idle lines with 1 disable Access priority Automatic 5 Reserved 6 Selects the result when a DISA DDI 0 reorder tone is 1 None MSN TIE call is invalid sent 1 IRNA 7 Selects the result when a DISA DDI 0 IRNA 1 None MSN TIE call arrives at a busy 1 busy tone is extension which has disabled Call sent Waiting 8 Selects the forwarding destination when 0 destination of 1 Call Forwarding an outside call is transferred from an intercom calls extension or the VPS to an extension 1 destination of where the Call Forwarding has been set incoming outside calls 9 Selects the result when the first digit 0 disconnect 1 None timer or the inter digit timer used for toll 1 do not restriction checking assigned in disconnect programme 207 First Digit Time or 208 Inter Digit Time expires 10 Enables or disables retry by diall ingX 0 dial X 1 DISA during DISA outside to ou
157. er To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Not Stored 4 Enter a TIE table number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions This is the first and basic programming for the E amp M TIE Line feature If this assignment is changed it will affect other programming 432 through 436 Toassign all outside line groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 E amp M Programming 311 44 TIE Line Programming Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service 312 E amp M Programming 44 TIE Line Programming 432 TIE Incoming Assignment Description Assigns the TIE incoming method immediate or wink to each TIE table according to your central office service Immediate Incoming TIE calls can be received right after the receiving signal arrives Wink Incoming TIE calls can be received after the wink signal is transmitted to the central office after the receiving signal arrives Selection TIE table number 1 through 4 Xll TIE tables Immediate Wink Default All TIE tables Wink Programming 1 Enter 432 Display TIE Signal In
158. er can enter any account code if needed Verified All Calls mode The user must always enter a pre assigned account code to make an outside call Verified Toll Restriction Override mode The user must enter a pre assigned account code when the user needs to override toll restriction Selection COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Option Verify All Verified All Calls Verify Toll Verified Toll Restriction Override Default AII COS Option Programming 1 Enter 508 Display Call Accounting 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Option 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 170 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming e Programme 105 Account Codes is used to define the Account Codes for the Verified modes Features Guide References Account Code Entry Toll Restriction General Programming 171 2 6 COS Programming 509 O ff Hook Call Announcement OHCA Description This programme determines which Class of Service COS are allowed to perform the Off
159. er voice mail number 01 you can also press NEXT Display VM 01 02 1 165 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another voice mail number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired voice mail number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END General Programming 79 2 2 System Programming Conditions For the KX TD1232 VM 01 through VM 08 are for the Master System and VM 09 through VM 16 are for the Slave System if available You cannot leave an entry empty The first one or two digits of the voice mail extension numbers are subject to programme 10 O Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks The display shows VM XX YY 1 ZZZ in step 3 XX means the voice mail number YY means the jack number of the voice mail port programmed in 117 Voice Mail Number Assignment of YY 1 means the first part of the jack number in digital line Y Y 2 means the second number of the jack number in digital line Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers areinvalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 thro
160. esired letter Pressing SELECT twice gives the letter m pressing three times gives N and so on 3 Using the Jog Dial for KX T7531 KX T7533 KX T7536 KX T7433 KX T7436 only See Combination Table b a Press 6 M belongs to 6 b Rotate the Jog Dial one pulse Rotating the Jog Dial an appropriate number of pulses gives you the desired letter Rotating the Jog Dial two pulses gives the letter m rotating three pulses gives N and so on OR a Press any dialling keypad b Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired character appears Ifyou keep rotating the Jog Dial all of the characters will be displayed For example if you rotate the Jog Dial after pressing 2 characters will appear in the following order Aa B b e Z z space lt gt amp AaBb eee Example of entering characters to enter Mike Using method 1 See Combination Table a a Enter 6 6 M N O b Press Soft 1 v M M N O C Enter 4 MA G H I d Press SHIFT M4 g h al e Press Soft 3 i Mi g h i Programming Instructions 19 1 4 Entering Characters f Enter 5 Mi5 j k 1 g Press Soft 2 k Mik j k 1 h Enter 3 Mik3 d e E i Press Soft 2 e Mike d e E Using method 2 See Combination Table a Procedures The display s
161. f available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods e To assign all jacks or all outside lines to one selection press the key in step 3 or 4 In these cases the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or outside line 01 To assign no outside line for an extension press CLEAR in step 4 Features Guide References Night Service Outside Line Connection Assignment Outgoing 182 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 607 608 D oorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Description These programmes assign the extensions which will ring when a doorphone call is received during the day and night modes Programmed extensions are also allowed to open the door Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Doorphone number KX TD816 1 and 2 two entries max KX TD1232 1 through 4 four entries max Default Jack 01 1 All doorphones Other jacks no doorphone Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 607 for day or 608 for night Display example Doorphone In Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after ente
162. feature Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the call Selection Enable Disable Default Enable Programming 1 Enter 810 Display DISA Tone Detect 2 Press NEXT Display Tone DTC Enable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA General Programming 203 2 8 Resource Programming 811 D ISA TIE User Codes Description Assigns the Direct Inward System Access DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service COS to each code The code COS determines the toll restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller Selection DISA TIE user code number 01 through 32 DISA TIE user code 4 through 10 digits COS number 1 through 8 Default All DISA TIE user code numbers DISA TIE user code Blank COS number 8 Programming 1 Enter 811 Display User Code 2 Press NEXT Display User Code NO 3 Enter a DISA TIE user code number To enter user code number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 C 8 4 Enter a DISA TIE user code To delete the carrent entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new code 5 Press WiP rogramme COS 6 Enter a COS number To change the current entry enter the new COS number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another user code press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and
163. ferences Call Forwarding Class of Service COS General Programming 225 2 9 Optional Programming 226 General Programming Section ISDN Programming ISDN Programming 227 3 1 Manager Programming 3 1 Manager Programming 005 F Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on proprietary telephones from a centralised telephone Selection Jack number lexible CO Button Assignment KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Button Code plus parameter if required Button Code Parameter 0 Single CO KX TD816 01 through 08 Outside line number KX TD1232 01 through 54 Outside line number 1 DSS 2 through 4 digits Extension number 2 One Touch Dialling 16 digits max Telephone number 3 Message Waiting None 4 FWD DND None 5 Save None 6 Account None 7 Conference None 80 Log In Log Out None 82 Voice Mail Transfer 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 83 Two Way Record 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 84 Two Way Transfer 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 85 Live Call Screening None 86 Live Call Screening Cancel None 87 Alert None 88 Phantom Extension 2 through 4 digits Phantom extension number 89 ISDN Service 16 digits max ISDN service number 8
164. g SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END DECT Programming 367 5 3 Extension Programming Conditions e To assign all PSs or all outside lines to one selection press the key in step 3 or 4 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 or the PS 01 When you change the PS registration number by pressing NEXT or PREV the outside line number will not changed Example PS01 CO06 Press NEXT PS02 CO06 Features Guide References Night Service Outside Line Connection Assignment Outgoing 368 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 663 664 P S Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Description These programmes assign which PSs will ring when a doorphone call is received during the day and night modes Programmed PSs are also allowed to open the door Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Doorphone number KX TD816 1 or 2 Disable two entries max KX TD1232 1 through 4 Disable four entries max Default All PSs Disable No doorphones Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 663 for day or 664 for night Display example PS DPH in Day 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS
165. group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 1 5sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions The disconnect time must be longer than the requirements of the central office or the host PBX Toassign all outside line groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 Programme 401 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign each outside line to an outside line group Features Guide References Flash General Programming 155 2 5 Outside Line Programming 417 O utside Line Name Assignment Description Assigns company or customer names to each outside line so that the operator or extension user can view the destination which the caller is trying to reach before answering Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 54 X all outside lines Name 10 characters max Default All outside lines Not stored Programming 1 Enter 417 Display CO Line Name 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Not Stored 4 Enter a
166. h 08 Ring tone type 2 Other CO buttons Not stored KX TD1232 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 24 Single CO 01 through 24 Ring tone type 2 012 ISDN Extension Number Set All ports Not stored 013 ISDN Extension Name Set All ports Not stored 014 Budget Management on ISDN Port All ports 0 100 Flexible Numbering See Feature Number List 402 Default Values Programme Default 109 Expansion Unit Type KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 112 ISDN Network Type Assignment Mode 8 150 DDI Translation Table All locations Not stored 151 152 D DI Ringing Assignment Day All locations Not stored Night 418 ISDN Line Number Assignment All outside lines Not stored 419 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service All outside lines Enable Assignment 421 ISDN DDI MSN Removed Digit Added Number Assignment All ports Removed digit 0 Added number Not stored 424 ISDN PortType All ports CO 425 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Call Other ports Permanent KX TD1232 AII ports Permanent 426 ISDN Configuration KX TD816 Ports 05 and 06 Multipoint Other ports Point KX TD1232 All ports Point 427 ISDN Data Link Mode KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Call Other ports Permanent KX TD1232 AII ports Permanent 428 ISDN TEI Mode KX TD816 Port 05 and 06
167. h 24 are for the Slave if available Outside lines 25 through 54 become available when the KX TD290 expansion unit is installed in the KX TD1232 Toassign all outside lines to one outside line group press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Features Guide References Outside Line Group General Programming 139 2 5 Outside Line Programming 402 D i alMode Selection Description Each outside line can be programmed for DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency pulse rotary or call blocking This programme assigns your choice to each line DTMF The dialling signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to tone signals and transmitted to the outside line Pulse The dialling signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to pulse signals and transmitted to the outside line Call blocking If your central office can receive both DTMF and pulse signals but you are contracted for pulse select this mode When dialling on the line with a touch tone telephone only the pulse signals are sent to the outside line Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines DTMF Pulse C Block call blocking Default All outside lines Pulse Programming 1 Enter 402 Display CO Dial Mode 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an ou
168. h 6 8 Press END Conditions This system can store up to ten programmable DISA built in auto attendant numbers Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA 212 General Programming 2 9 Optional Programming 2 9 Optional Programming 990 System Additional Information Description Allows the following programming items to be changed if required Each bit in each Area represents a programming item Chart for the Areas and Bits Bit Number 10 918 m Nn m Un Em EN Em w Em N Em Em Em Display Example Area 01 Area 02 Area 03 Area 04 Area 05 Area 06 Area 07 zyrarrarr ama FIF RIE Rlololo FIP RIB RlOlolR FIP RIE Rlololo FIF RIB RlololR P pBlojH ojol o P pjlojHj jol olo FIP Rlol Rlol olo FIP BIPl olo o B FIPF RIPl ololo R s FIF RIPlolo Riol FIP Rlololololol FIP RIPlolo Riol FIP Rlololo Riol FIF RIPlolololol s HIRIE RIG OOIE Area 08 General Programming 213 2 9 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 01 1 _ Sound source during transfer 0 ringback tone 1 Call Transfer 1 Music on Hold e Music on Hold 2 Result of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly and then placing down the Hold Hold handset du
169. he desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e A command signal number can have a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 FLASH and PAUSE The FLASH button is available only for LV MSG and GETMSG commands to store H which means Home Position If H is stored for LV MSG a mailbox number programmed in programme 609 Vaice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the VM port Follow On ID function If certain codes are required before and after the ID code insert H between the codes as aaaHbbb If nothing is stored it will operate as H f XH is stored for GETMSG a mailbox number programmed in programme 60 9 Voice Mail Access Codesan d 665 PS Voice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the port succeeding the X Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Inband 74 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 115 Adjust Time Description Used to adjust the time for checking the normality of system data Every day at the programmed time the data adjustment is performed Selection e Hour 1 through 12 Minute 00 through 59 e AM PM Default 1 00 AM Programming 1 Enter 115 Display Adjust Time 2 Press NEXT to programme hour Display example 1 00 AM 3 Enter the hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new hour 4 Press Wi rogramme m
170. hows 1 Enter 6 6 2 Press SELEC M 3 Enter 4 M4 4 Press SELECT six times Mi 5 Enter 5 Mi5 6 Press SELECT four times Mik 7 Enter 3 Mik3 8 Press SELECT four times Mike Using method 3 See Combination Table b Procedures The display shows 1 Enter 6 6 2 Rotate Jog Dial one pulse M 3 Enter 4 M4 4 Rotate Jog Dial six pulse Mi 5 Enter 5 Mi5 6 Rotate Jog Dial four pulses Mik 7 Enter 3 Mik3 8 Rotate Jog Dial four pulses Mike 20 Programming Instructions 1 4 Entering Characters OR Procedures The display shows 1 Enter 2 2 2 Rotate Jog Dial until M appears M 3 Enter 2 M2 4 Rotate Jog Dial until i appears Mi 5 Enter 2 Mi2 6 Rotate Jog Dial until k appears Mik 7 Enter 2 Mik2 8 Rotate Jog Dial until e appears Mike zZ e e e To erase all the letters press CLEAR To erase the last letter press amp Programming Instructions 21 1 5 User Programming 1 5 User Programming Mode User Programming Mode Manager programming items programme address OXX are accessible by any display proprietary telephone user in the system Entering the user programming mode You can access these programmes by entering the User Programming Mode as follows Before entering the mode confirm that Your telephone is on hook Nocalls are on hold at your telepho
171. hrough 6 8 Press END Conditions Toassign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Executive Busy Override 168 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 507 Do Not Disturb Override Description This programme determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform Do Not Disturb DND Override Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Disable Enable Default AII COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 507 Display DND Override 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Do Not Disturb DND General Programming 169 2 6 COS Programming 508 A ccount Code Entry Mode Description There are three account code modes Option Verified All Calls and Verified Toll Restriction Override This programme determines the mode to be used by each Class of Service COS Option mode The us
172. hrough 9 x tis possible to assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective extension blocks Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programmes 00 3 Extension Number Set 0 12 ISDN Extension Number Set 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set 130 P hantom Extension Number Set 813 Floating Number Assignment and 671 PS Extension Number Set e If Xr ft is included in a feature number dial pulse telephone users cannot access the feature Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid Valid entry examples 30 and 31 210 and 211 Invalid entry examples 5 and 5 30 and 301 e If you delete a feature number the feature cannot be used by dialling operation You can remove all the feature numbers except selections 01 through 16 Toclear an extension block 01 through 16 it is required to change the corresponding numbers assigned in programmes 003 Ext ension Number Set 12 ISD N Extension Number Set 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set 130 P hantom Extension Number Set 813 Fl oating Number Assignment and 671 PS Ext ension Number Set Features Guide References Flexible Numbering E amp M Programming 301 4 1 System Programming 109 E xpansion Unit Type Description Assigns the type of expansion units to be used in the system This allows the system to identify the unit in each expansion unit location Selection KX TD816 e Are
173. ht for ISDN Extension 279 61 7 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for Extension eene 281 61 S8 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension eere 283 3 5 Optional Programming ecc tionen reto o esee Soon rennen oen eene nae eua n eo ros nere one A 285 99 0O System Additional Information essen enne 213 4 E amp M Programming iei ee hei tedoeoteceecneen n 297 44 System Programming oeeuteuoo recor eto orto ra om ene ele ero Do os e Ga apo eR o bbb UE aee as EEs inen 298 10 O Plexible Numbering ini tene Hr erinnere tete et tete e eines 53 10 9 Expansion Unit Type ou otc at ieee edi olin an lives ese e tuenda 69 EPA d pe eui PT 304 12 9 E amp M Signal Assignment essent nennen nennen nenne enne 305 4 2 Timer Programmniing erue ecce enean ueneno nera re sooo neenon nd nano sessseesensedeosseescossessontes 306 22 OJTIE First Inter Digit Time sees a ener 306 4 3 TIE Line Routing Table Programming ee ee e eee eene eere eee eo nest to ee ene s e tnus 307 34 OJTIE Line Routing Table seseesessseeeseeeeeene nennen enne enne 307 34 1 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added Dial se 309 444 TIE Line Programming 1er terrent eet entente o n neenon eor aee 311 43 1 TIE Table Number Assignment sees enne enne 311 43 2 TIE
174. ice Mail Transfer 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 83 Two Way Record 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 84 Two Way Transfer 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 85 Live Call Screening None 86 Live Call Screening Cancel None 87 Alert None 88 Phantom Extension 2 through 4 digits Phantom extension number 89 ISDN Service 16 digits max ISDN service number 8 Night None X Loop CO None Group CO 1 through 8 Outside line group number CO Ringer frequency 1 through 8 Ring tone type number 38 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming Available when this system is connected toa Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP200 Default KX TD816 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 Single CO 01 through 08 Ring tone type 2 Other CO buttons Not stored KX TD1232 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 24 Single CO 01 through 24 Ring tone type 2 Programming 1 Enter 005 Display Flexible Key Asn 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display PT PGM Mode 4 Press the CO button which is changed to another button The display shows the contents pre assigned to the button Display example CO 01 5 Enter a button code plus parameter if required To change
175. iday 7 Saturday very day of the week e Hour 1 through 12 Disable no switching Minute 0 through 59 AM PM Default Every day of the week Day 9 00 AM Night 5 00 PM Programming 1 Enter 102 Display Day Night Time 2 Press NEXT Display Day of Week 3 Enter the day of the week selection number To select Sunday you can also press NEXT Display example Sun Day 9 00 AM To select night mode press NEXT Display example Sun Nig 5 00 PM 4 Enter the hour To set no switching keep pressing SELECT until Disable is displayed and go to step 9 If SELEC is pressed the display shows the previous entry If the previous setting was Disable press SELECT to enter the starting time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 5 Press M 6 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new minutes 7 Press gt Press SELECT for AM or PM 9 Press STORE e 58 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 10 To programme another day night mode or day of the week press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the day of the week selection number 11 Repeat steps 4 through 10 12 Press END Conditions To select the desired day you may keep pressing NEXT in step 3 To assign every day of the week to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Sunday e If day
176. ine group basis This restriction applies to the following 1 A TIE call using DISA 2 Call Forwarding to a TIE line 3 Call Transfer to a TIE line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X ull outside line groups Enable Disable Default All outside line groups Disable Programming 1 Enter 437 Display CO TIE Transfer 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group number 1 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service 320 E amp M Programming 44 TIE Line Programming 438 TIE to Outside Transfer Description Enables or disables transferring TIE calls to an outside line on an outside line group basis This restriction applies to the following 1 An outside call through another PBX 2 Call Forwarding to an outside line 3 Call Transfer to an outside line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X Xall outside li
177. ine 01 e If an outside line is also programmed for DIL 1 N in programmes 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night it is regarded as a DIL 1 1 line e Assignable extension numbers are programmed in the following programmes Extension numbers 0 03 Extension Number Set ISDN extension numbers 01 2 JISDN Extension Number Set Voice Mail extension numbers 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Phantom extension numbers 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Floating numbers of External Pagers DISA messages extension groups and modem only 813 Floating Number Assignment PS extension number 6 7 1 PS Extension Number Set Features Guide References Direct In Lines DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Night Service General Programming 147 2 5 Outside Line Programming 409 410 I ntercept Extension Day Night Description Intercept Routing provides an automatic re direction of calls which cannot or have not been answered IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer These programmes set the destination in both day and night modes for each outside line group Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X ull outside line groups Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no Intercept Routing Default All outside line groups Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 409 for day or 410 for night Display example TRG Intercpt Day 2
178. ing 602 Extension Group Assignment Description Assigns each extension to an extension group Extension groups are used for Group Call Pickup Station Hunting and Paging Group Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part Extension group number 1 through 8 Default All jacks 1 2 Extension group 1 Programming 1 Enter 602 Display EXT Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 EXG1 4 Enter the extension group number To change the current entry enter the new extension group number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of eight extension groups Each extension can only belong to one group e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available General Programming 177 2 7 Extension Programming e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods Toassign all jacks to one extension group press the X key in step 3 In this case the di
179. ing SMDR General Programming 193 2 8 Resource Programming 802 S ystem Data Printou Description Starts or stops printing the system data All the current system programmed data is printed out Selection Start Stop Default Not applicable Programming 1 Enter 802 Display System Data Dump 2 Press NEXT Display Print out Start 3 Press STORE to start printing Printing starts To stop printing press SELECT and go to step 4 When printing is completed the display shows Display Print Out Finish 4 Press STORE Display Print Out Stop 5 Press END Conditions e tis necessary to connect a printer to the Serial Interface RS 232C port provided on the system e You may stop printing by pressing the END button while records are being printed out e You cannot restart the printout while records are being output Features Guide References Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 194 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 803 Music Source Use Description Assigns the music source to be used for Music on Hold and Background Music BGM Selection Hold BGM Music source number KX TD816 1 No Use KX TD1232 1 through 4 No Use Default Hold and BGM Music 1 Programming 1 Enter 803 Display Music Source Use 2 Press NEXT to programme Music on Hold Display example Hold Musicl 3 Enter a music source number To select no music
180. ing and the start of the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and this timer expires the system starts counting the call A display telephone shows the elapsed time of the call The starting time and the duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record Selection Time seconds 0 through 60 Default Os Programming 1 Enter 212 Display SMDR Durat Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 0 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions The timer starts counting after all the digits are dialled This timer does not apply to incoming calls The timer for incoming calls starts immediately e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Display Message Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 114 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 213 DISA Delayed Answer Time Description Assigns the number of rings between a call received and the answer by the Direct Inward System Access DISA feature Selection Number of rings 0 through 6 Default 1 ring Programming 1 Enter 213 Display DISA Delayed Ans 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 1 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions
181. ing ports Not stored Programming 1 Enter 156 Display MW PORT 2 Press NEXT Display MW UNIT NO gt 3 Enter a unit numbe To enter unit number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Ul MW J 4 Enter a message waiting port numbe Display example Ul MW 01J 5 Press um 6 Enter a single line telephone jack numbe Display example Ul MW 01J 15 7 Press gt 8 Enter a sub port numbe Display example Ul MW 01J 15 2 9 Press STORE 10 To programme another message waiting port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired message waiting port numbe 11 Repeat steps 5 through 10 100 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 12 Press END Conditions To programme another unit start from step 1 e For the KX TD1232 the unit numbers 1 through 3 are for the Master System and 4 through 6 are for the Slave System and jack numbers 01 through 32 are for Master System and 33 through 64 are for Slave System e For the KX TD1232 single line telephone jacks connected to the KX TD194 must belong to the same system as the data port assigned in programme 154 For example if the assigned data port is one of the extension jacks in the master system the KX TD194 must be connected to jacks 01 through 32 On the other hand if the assigned data port is one of the extension jacks in the slave system the KX TD194 must be connected to jacks 33 through 64 Programming exam
182. inute 5 Enter the Minute To change the current entry enter the new minute Press WiPorogramme AM PM Press SELECT for AM or PM Press STORE Press END 00 1 2 Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty Master and slave systems are synchronsed with each other Features Guide References None General Programming 75 2 2 System Programming 116 ROM Version Display Description Confirms the version of ROM of the system Display example P011A30101A Version Date Selection System number KX TD816 0 KX TD1232 0 Master 1 Slave Default Not applicable Programming 1 Enter 116 Display ROM Version 2 Press NEXT Display System NO 3 Enter the system number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system 4 To confirm the other system press SELECT and enter the system number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system 5 Press END Conditions Theout of service system number is unacceptable e For KX TD816 you can enter the system number 0 only Skip step 4 Features Guide References None 76 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 117 Voice Mail Number Assignment Description Assigns the jack number corresponding to the voice mail port for data transmission tothe Voice Processing System The voice mail port is expandable to four ports 8 ports during System Connection for KX TD1232
183. ion Determines the outside lines which can be accessed by an extension in both day and night modes The extension users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned outside lines Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 X 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 Xzall jacks 1 first part 2 second part Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Enabl enable Disab disable Default All jacks 1 2 All outside lines Enable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 605 for day or 606 for night Display example CO Out Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 4 01 1 CO01 Enabl 4 Enter the desired outside line number or keep pressing m gt nti m desired outside line is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END General Programming 181 2 7 Extension Programming Conditions Forthe KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave i
184. ion or telephone numbers must be stored in programme 015 Quick Dialling Number Set Selection Location number 01 through 80 Flexible quick dialling number 4 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 104 Display FLX Quick Dial 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 3 Enter a location numbe To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a flexible quick dialling numbe To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of 80 flexible dialling numbers Each number has a maximum of 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 xnd e The double storing or the contradictory combination of storing is disabled Example Enable 30 and 31 210 and 211 44 and 450 etc Disable 5 and 5 1 and 10 30 and 301 etc General Programming 61 2 2 System Programming Features Guide References Quick Dialling 62 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 105 Account Codes Description Assigns the account codes for Account Code Entry Verified All Calls and Verified Toll Restriction Override modes If Verified All Calls is assigned in programme 508 Account
185. iple Subscriber Number Description Selects whether the Multiple Subscriber Number MSN is allocated to each terminal equipment e g ISDN telephone on the ISDN SO bus or not on an ISDN port basis Selection Default Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports Enable Disable no number All ports Disable Programming 1 Enter 429 Display MSN Service Press NEXT Display Port NO Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 You must assign on extension number to the ISDN terminal beforehand For details refer to your terminal s manual 264 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN Ringing Service ISDN Programming 265 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 430 I SDN Extension Progress Tone Description Enables or disables to se
186. ired outside line number is displayed 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 General Programming 179 2 7 Extension Programming 9 Press END Conditions An extension can be assigned as the destination of as many outside lines as required Forthe KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods To assign all jacks or all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 or step 4 In these cases the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or for outside line 01 There are six notification methods a Immediate ringing rings immediately b 1 ring delay c 3 ring delay d 6 ring delay e No ring only the indicator flashes f Disable no incoming call When you change the jack number by pressing NEXT or PREV the outside line number is not changed Example 03 1 CO06 Press NEXT 03 2 CO06 Features Guide References Direct In Lines DIL Night Service 180 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 605 606 O utgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night Descript
187. item Chart for the Areas and Bits Bit Number m N m Un m A m Oe m t3 Em Em 10 9 8 m Display Example Area 01 Area 02 Area 03 Area 04 Area 05 Area 06 Area 07 Area 08 Irlelelerlole o FIP RIE Rlololo FIP RIE RloOl o R Irlrelerelerlololo tlelelelelolole ma xz ES EAE NECS E dit sul RO E ms mE SAO rp reo O P pBliejHjojo oj P piPiHjojololH FIF RIPlolo Riol FIP Rlololololol FIP BIPl olo Riol FIP Rlololo Riol FIF RIP ololofol s P eljejsljojololeC 330 E amp M Programming 4 6 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 01 1 Sound source during transfer 0 ringback tone 1 Call Transfer 1 Music on Hold e Music on Hold 2 Result of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly and then placing down the Hold Hold handset during an outside call single 1 disconnection line telephones only 3 Result of pressing the FLASH button on 0 disconnection 0 External proprietary telephones during an signal Feature Access outside call External Feature Access is 1 External Feature e Flash effective only during a call via an Access analogue outside line 4 7 Reserved 8 Enables or disables the
188. itions Acentralised telephone is a telephone connected to jack 01 or a jack programmed as a manager extension in programme 006 Ope rator Manager Extension Assignment Forthe KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable The number of the CO buttons available depends on the telephone type Refer to Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and Consoles in the Features Guide For the KX T7500 series telephones 24 CO buttons can be programmed by adding 12 CO buttons by connecting the KX T7545 Add on key Module If you press the same CO button again in step 5 you can select a desired ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring tones When you enter the tone type number 1 through 8 you will hear the selected tone type until STORE is pressed This selection is possible only for the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single CO Group CO or Loop CO Features Guide References Button Flexible Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and Consoles 230 ISDN Programming 3 1 Manager Programming 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Description Assigns an extension number to each port which is connected to the ISDN SO unit Selection Default Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 Extension Number 2 or 3 digits All ports Not stored Programming 1
189. lay LOCKED With a display PT 22 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration numbe 23 Repeat steps 4 through 21 24 Press END Conditions e Itis possible to search the display by pressing Next or X revious in steps 8 and 10 e You can assign an extension number to each PS also in progr amme 671 PS Extension Number Set e The PS password can be assigned in progr amme 672 PS Password Set OnePS must have only one registration number It is not possible to assign the different registration number for one PS If the PS extension number or the PS password is changed after registering the PS cannot be used until it is registered again in this programme Do not press END after step 15 or it may not registered correctly 352 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming To re assign the PS which is set the System Lock to the other DECT system it is required to cancel the System Lock first in PS Programming Setting the System Lock e Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 through 264 012 ISDN Extension Number Set
190. lay PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe 354 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 EXT 281 4 Press STORE Display Rejected The PS is not registered correctly The display will show the next example below in a few seconds Display example Delete 5 Go to Step 7 when not deleting Press STORE 7 To delete another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration numbe e 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 9 Press END Conditions Deleting the same PS registration number from the PS by PS Programming is only necessary when it is deleted after Rejected is displayed in this programme e IfaPS registration is terminated in this programme all the PS assignments and its extension assignments will return to the default settings If you only want to change the PS retaining all the assignments re enter the replacing PS on the old PS registration number in programme 650 PS Registration In this case you should reset the system so that the assignment is activated Features Guide References Digital Wireless Connection DECT Programming 355 5 38 Extension Programming 653 P S Extension Name Set Description Assigns names to the PS extension numbers programmed in progr amme 671 PS Extension Number Set Selection PSregistration number KX T
191. led with the ISDN SO line unit but not with the analogue outside line unit An out of service system is unassignable In this case skip steps 8 and 9 for the KX TD1232 For the KX TD1232 if only the Slave System is in operation the display shows Slave in step 2 After changing the setting turn the Power Switch off and on once Otherwise the previous setting will remain Features Guide References None DECT Programming 349 5 3 Extension Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 650 P S Registration Description Assigns a registration number and an extension number to each PS Steps 1 through 5 and 22 through 24 must be operated with yourdisplay PT and steps 6 through 21 with the PS whose registration number is to be set Selection With a display PT PSregistration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e PS extension number 2 through 4 digits With a PS DECT system number 1 through 4 PS password 4 digits System lock password 1 through 4 digits Default All PSs Not stored Programming With a display PT 1 Enter 650 Display PS Registration 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe Display example PSO1 Not Stored 4 Enter the PS extension number Display example PSO1 Ext 281 5 Press STORE If enabled Display Executing Continue programming from step 6 with a PS within five minutes
192. lt Feature Guide References 05 1 6 Reserved 7 In the day mode selects the destination 0 DIL 1 N 1 e DDI of incoming DDI numbers or MSN 1 operator e MSN Ringing numbers when 0 is assigned in Service programmes 151 152 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night and 448 449 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 8 Inthenight mode selects the destination 0 DIL 1 N 1 DDI of incoming DDI numbers or MSN 1 operator MSN Ringing numbers when 0 is assigned in Service programmes 151 152 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night and 448 449 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 9 Assigns whether a new page is ejected 0 disable 0 Hotel Application or not when the Hotel Application is 1 enable printed out by SMDR 10 When Timed Reminder starts and is not 0 disable 1 Timed Reminder answered this programme enables or 1 enable disables the SMDR printout for Timed Reminder 11 Enables or disables to send a COLP 0 enable 1 COLP number 1 disable CLIR COLR 12 16 Reserved 218 General Programming 2 9 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 06 Sets the time after terminating the OGM 0 0s 58 m DISA OGM Determines whether the account code is printed out or not shown in dots by the SMDR shown in dots shown a SMDR
193. mber To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRGl1 Small Large 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group numbe Un 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions The default setting Small Large often may cause a busy situation between two PBXs as the same line may be seized by both sides simultaneously In this case we recommend changing the setting of either PBX to Large Small e To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group number 1 Features Guide References None 160 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 2 6 COS Programming 500 501 Tall Restriction Level Day Night Description Each extension must be assigned a Class of Service COS These programs set the toll restriction value for each COS in day or night mode Selection COS number 1 through 8 all COS Level number 1 through 8 Default COS 1 through 7 Level 1 Day Night COS 8 Level 7 Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 500 for day or 501 for night Display example TRS Level Day 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 yo
194. me 502 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit assigns if the restriction is done for both outgoing and incoming calls or for outgoing calls only 0 both calls 1 outgoing calls only None Allows you to remove confirmation tone 4 By default a beep tone sounds when a three party conference is started ended 0 disable 1 enable Confirmation Tone Determines if the dialled X and will be checked by Toll Restriction This assignment is required for certain central offices CO to prevent toll fraud Some COs ignore the user dialled X and ff If your CO is such a type select 0 no check 0 no check 1 check Toll Restriction Enables or disables the Flash function when an outside call is received at a locked or toll restricted station Flash if enabled allows the user to make an outside call using the same line If 0 disconnection signal is selected in Area 01 bit 3 above this is also allowed for those extensions that have the Account Code Verified All Calls mode assigned 0 disable 1 enable Flash Allows you to remove confirmation tone 3 This tone is sent when a conversation is established just after dialling the feature number for accessing the following features Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve 0 disable 1 enable Confirmation Tone 332 E amp M Programming 4 6 O
195. min Programming 1 Enter 206 Display CO CO Dur Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 min 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Call Forwarding Call Transfer Conference Direct Inward System Access DISA 108 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 207 First Digit Time Description Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of an outside dial tone and the first digit dialled on an outgoing outside call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency receiver is released Selection Time seconds 5 through 120 Default 10s Programming 1 Enter 207 Display lst Digit Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Toll Restriction General Programming 109 2 3 Timer Programming 208 I nter Digit Time Description Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing toll call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF DualTone Multi Frequency receiver is released
196. mming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 02 7 An outside line set to pulse or call 0 60 0 Dial Type blocking mode in programme 1 67 Selection 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing Select an appropriate ratio depending on the standard in your country 8 Determines whether an extension 0 extension 0 Voice Mail mailbox number is substituted by the number Integration extension number or itis programmable 1 free free If a call is forwarded or rerouted to the VPS this system automatically transmits the mailbox number to the VPS to specify the user s mailbox To make it programmable select 1 free then assign the number in programme 609 Voice Mail Access Codes and 665 PSVoice Mail Access Codes 9 Determines the initial display of a 0 names 0 Call Directory digital display proprietary telephone 1 numbers except for KX T7230 in Station Speed Dialling 10 Reserved 12 11 Selects inter digit pause for pulse 00 630 ms 01 None dialling 01 830 ms 10 1030 ms 13 Selects intercom dial tone frequency 0 normal 0 None 1 distinctive 14 Reserved 15 Sets the maximum time for detecting a 0 1000 ms 0 None hooking signal from a single line 1 136 ms telephone 16 Reserved 288 ISDN Programming 3 5 Optional Programming
197. mo ri mjo 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 H Programming Instructions 17 1 4 Entering Characters Combination Table b Jog Dial Display sequence by rotating the Jog Dial The alphabetical characters correspond to the letters shown on the twelve dialling keys on the proprietary telephone except symbols In Combination Table a If your telephone is a KX T7531 do not use the provided SELECT button Use the AUTO ANSWER MUTE button which becomes the SELECT button when using the overlay In Combination Table b If you keep rotating the Jog Dial all of the characters in the table will be displayed Character Entering Methods Please see the following example which shows how to select a desired character For example to select the letter M Select either of the following three methods 1 Using the SHIFT and Soft buttons for KX T7533 KX T7536 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7230 KX T7235 only See Combination Table a a Press 6 M belongs to 6 The Function Line shows MNO b Press the Soft 1 M button Press SHIFT to display the lower case of the above letters 2 Using the SELECT button See Combination Table a a Press 6 M belongs to 6 b Press the SELECT button once 18 Programming Instructions 1 4 Entering Characters Pressing the SELECT button an appropriate number of times gives you the d
198. mp the cursor to the desired bit Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and enter the new selection To programme another bit repeat steps 4 and 5 Press STORE To programme another area press SELECT and the desired area code Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END 392 DECT Programming 5 4 Optional Programming Conditions None Features Guide References None DECT Programming 393 5 4 Optional Programming 394 DECT Programming Section Default Values DefaultValues 395 2 General Programming Programme Default 000 Date and Time Set 05 Jan 1 SUN 00 00 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set All speed dial numbers Not stored 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set All speed dial numbers Not stored 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 101 through 116 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 201 through 216 KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 101 through 164 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 201 through 264 004 Extension Name Set All jacks Not stored 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment KX TD816 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 Single CO 01 through 08 Ring tone type 2 Other CO buttons Not stored KX TD1232 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 24 Single CO 01 through 24 Ring tone type 2 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment
199. n Number to be added 4 digits max Default All locations Deleted digit 0 Added Dial Blank Programming 1 Enter 341 Display TIE Remove Add 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 3 Enter a location numbe To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 0 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press Wi rogramme the number to be added 6 Enter the number to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location numbe 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions Each added number has a maximum of 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 E amp M Programming 309 4 3 TIE Line Routing Table Programming Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service 310 E amp M Programming 44 TIE Line Programming 4 4 TIE Line Programming 431 TIE Table Number Assignment Description Assigns a TIE table number to each outside line group Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 all outside line groups TIE table number 1 through 4 Default All outside line groups Not stored Programming 1 Enter 431 Display TIE Table NO 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group numb
200. n Programming 1 Enter 805 Display Ext Pag Ack Ton 2 Press NEXT Display example Tone On 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions The external pager is a user supplied item For KX TD816 one external pager can be installed for KX TD1232 two external pagers can be installed per system External pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available Features Guide References Confirmation Tone Paging General Programming 199 2 8 Resource Programming 806 807 S erial Interface RS 232C Parameters Description Assigns the communication parameters for the Serial Interface RS 232C for Port 1 for KX TD816 and Master System of KX TD1232 or Port 2 for Slave System of KX TD1232 New line code Select the code for your printer or personal computer If your printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return select CR If not select CR LF Baud rate A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer Word length A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character Parity A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer Stop bit A stop
201. n Number Set Not stored Features Guide References Phantom Extension 94 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 148 Off Hook Monitor Description Enables or disables to perform the Off Hook Monitor Selection Enable Disable Default Enable Programming 1 Enter 148 Display Off Hook Monitor 2 Press NEXT Display example Monitor Enable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 5 Press END A Conditions Off Hook Monitor is only available for the KX T7531 KX T7533 KX T7536 KX T7433 and KX T7436 telephone users Features Guide References Off Hook Monitor General Programming 95 2 2 System Programming 154 M essage Waiting Control Assigns the data ports which communicate with the Message Waiting Lamp Adaptor Unit Description KX TD194 Selection Unit TD194 number KX TD816 1 KX TD1232 1 through 6 Jack number KX TD816 02 through 16 KX TD1232 02 through 64 Default All units Not stored Programming 1 Enter 154 Display MW CONTROL 2 Press NEXT Display MW UNIT NO 3 Enter a unit numbe To enter unit number 1 you can also press NEXT Display exampl 4 Enter a jack numbe Display exampl 5 Press STORE e er Unit 1 Unit 1 Jack Jack 05 6 To programme another unit press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired unit number
202. n in Area 1 is displayed Press SP rogramme Area 2 if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area 2 is displayed Press STORE Press END NADANA U KX TD1232 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT to programme the Master System To programme Slave press NEXT again General Programming 69 2 2 System Programming NADANA U 9 Display example Master C E1 E2 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press gt rogramme another Area if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area is displayed Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are completed Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 10 Press NEXT to programme the Slave System Display example Slave C E1 E2 Repeat steps 3 through 7 if required 10 Press END Conditions The following units can be installed in the slots C 4 CO lines KX TD180 1 2 ISDN SO lines KX TD280 S2 6 ISDN SO lines KX TD286 S3 I PRIISDN line KX TD290 EM 4 E amp M lines KX TD184 E E1 E2 8 Extension lines KX TD170 KX TD144 or KX TD146 A Al A2 16 SLT lines KX TD174 There are two expansion areas in the KX TD816 areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top One extension line unit and one outside line CO ISDN SO E amp M unit can be installed There are three expansion ar
203. name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEA To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available Outside lines 25 through 54 become available when the KX TD290 expansion unit is installed in the KX TD1232 156 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Features Guide References Display Message Incoming Outside Call Information Display General Programming 157 2 5 Outside Line Programming 423 Pay ToneAssignment Description Enables Pay Tone for the outside lines An optional Pay Tone Card KX TD189 must be installed on the CO Line Card to receive a Pay Tone Selection Default Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines Enable Disable All outside lines Disable Programming 1 Enter 423 Display Pay Tone Asn Press NEXT Display CO Line NO Enter
204. ncoming Outside Call Information Display 188 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 616 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment Description Assigns whether to close the mailbox or keep recording the conversation after a call is intercepted This programme is available when this system is connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP200 Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all jacks Stop Record Keep Record Default All jacks Stop Record Programming 1 Enter 616 Display LCS Rec Mode 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Stop Record 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods General Programming 189 2 7 Extension Programming To assign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the content
205. nd 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 through 264 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 178 KX TD1232 165 through 180 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 199 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 199 291 through 294 296 through 299 671 PS Extension Number Set Not stored Programme 013 ISDN Extension Name Set is used to give names to the extension numbers Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Extension 232 ISDN Programming 3 1 Manager Programming 013 ISDN Extension Name Set Description Assigns names to the ISDN extension numbers programmed in programme 012 ISD Extension Number Set Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 Name 10 characters max Default All ports Not stored Programming 1 Enter 013 Display ISDN EXT Name 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter the first port number you can also press NEXT Display 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 1 AEntering Characters To delete the cur
206. nd the progress tone to ISDN extension on ISDN port basis Selection Default Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports Enable Disable no tone All ports Disable Programming 1 Enter 430 Display ISDN EXT Tone Press NEXT Display Port NO Enter a port numbe To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective 266 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Extension ISDN Programming 267 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 447 M SN Assignment Description Assigns a maximum of ten Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN on an ISDN port basis Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 01 through 12 Location number 01 through 10 MSN
207. ne Press PROGRAM or PAUSE x and enter the User Password default 1234 After entering the mode perform the same programming steps as the system programming steps in each programme address Note If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button substitute it with the PAUSE button fnothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM or PAUSE button is pressed it is cancelled The User Password is not shown on the display The password can be changed by system programming Refer to Section 2 2 125 User Password During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time 22 Programming Instructions 1 6 Programming Example 1 6 Programming Example Programming Example The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the programming mode and that you will employ method b of Going to another programme address in Section 1 3 P rogramming Methods Example programme 001 S ystem Speed Dialling Number Set Sample of Description Explanation 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set Description Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users There are 500 numbers from 000 through 499 4 Selection Speed dial number 000 through 499 Telephone number 24 digits max Default n All
208. ne groups Enable Disable Default All outside line groups Disable Programming 1 Enter 438 Display TIE CO Transfer 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group numbe To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group number 1 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 321 4 4 TIE Line Programming 439 T IE to TIE Transfer Description Enables or disables transferring TIE calls to a TIE line on an outside line group basis This restriction applies to the following 1 A TIE call through another PBX 2 Call Forwarding to a TIE line 3 Call Transfer to a TIE line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X ull outside line groups Enable Disable Default All outside line groups Enable Programming 1 Enter 439 Display TIE TIE Transfer 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line g
209. ng 104 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 203 Intercept Time Description Sets the number of rings for the Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA feature If a call is not answered after the programmed number of rings the call is redirected to the programmed station Selection Number of rings 3 through 48 Default 12 rings Programming 1 Enter 203 Display Intercept Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Onering is equivalent to five seconds e Programmes 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night are used to programme the destination of Intercept Routing on an outside line group basis in day and night modes e If the original extension has set Call Forwarding No Answer Intercept Timer starts after the Call Forwarding e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Intercept Routing General Programming 105 2 3 Timer Programming 204 P ickup Dial Waiting Time Description Sets the number of seconds for Pickup Dialling If the telephone user lifts the handset the programmed party is called when the time expires Selection Time seconds 1 through 5 Default 1s Programming 1 Enter 204 Display Pickup Dial Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 1 sec 3 Enter the time
210. ng Group hunting 65 Ringer frequency 38 229 ROM Version Display 76 Rotation of jack number 15 RS 232C 200 S Save button 38 228 342 SECRET button 12 Secret Dialling 31 SEL 12 SEL 12 SELECT button 12 SEL 12 Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters 200 SHIFT Button 11 Single CO button 38 228 342 SKP 16 SKP 16 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording 114 218 219 290 291 335 336 388 389 SMDR Format 193 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 191 SMDR Output Mode 210 Soft Buttons 11 Station Hunting 65 Station Hunting Type 65 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 114 218 219 290 291 335 336 388 389 Station Speed Dialling 216 288 333 386 STORE button 12 Super EXtra Device Port SXDP 357 SXDP Super EXtra Device Port 357 SXDP Assignment 357 System Additional Information 213 285 330 383 System Data Printout 194 System Password 14 67 System Speed Dialling 30 32 122 System Speed Dialling Name Set 32 System Speed Dialling Number Set 30 T Terminating hunting 65 TIE Added Number 317 TIE call 221 293 338 391 TIE First Inter Digit Time 306 TIE Incoming Assignment 313 TIE Line Routing Table 307 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added Dial 309 TIE Outgoing Assignment 314 TIE Receive Dial 327 TIE Security Type 323 TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit 316 TIE Table Number Assignment 311 TIE User Codes 204 328 TIE Wink Time O
211. ng Messages OGM Selection Time seconds 0 16 32 64 O no recording Default 32 0 32 0 for OGM 1 through 4 from left to right Programming 1 Enter 215 Display OGM Time 2 Press NEXT to programme the time for OGM 1 Display example OGM 32 0 32 0 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press Wi orogramme the time for OGM 2 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Repeat steps 4 and 5 to programme the time for OGM s 3 and 4 Press STORE Press END oo NADANA U Conditions e There are four messages available OGM 1 used for DISA Direct Inward System Access message 1 or UCD Uniform Call Distribution message 1 OGM 2 used for DISA message 2 or UCD message 2 OGM 3 used for Timed Reminder or UCD message 3 OGM 4 used for UCD message 4 Enter the times starting from the left for OGM 1 to OGM 4 Thetotal time of the outgoing messages cannot exceed 64 seconds Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA Outgoing Message OGM Timed Reminder Uniform Call Distribution UCD General Programming 117 2 3 Timer Programming 216 M essage Waiting Ring Interval Time Description Sets the Message Waiting ring interval time for a single line telephone Selection Time minutes 0 through 64 O no ring Default 10 min Programming 1 Enter 216 Displ lay MW Ring 2 Press NEXT Dis
212. nsion Programming 659 660 P S DIL 1 N Extension Day Night Description A DIL 1 N line can be assigned to call more than one extension All incoming calls from the programmed outside lines are directed to the specified PSs This programme assigns the PSs for each outside line in both the day and night modes Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Outside line number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Enabl enable Disab disable Default All PSs All outside lines Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 659 for day or 660 for night Display example PS DIL 1 N Day 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 CO01 Disab 4 Enter the outside line numbe You can also keep pressing Bi unt e desired outside line number is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END DECT Programming 365 5 3 Extension Programming Conditions e To assign all outside lines to Disable press the Xey in
213. ntil the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack numbe 7 Press END Un Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the slave if available To assign all jack numbers to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Features Guide References Charge Fee Reference General Programming 85 2 2 System Programming 123 C harge Verification ID Code Set Description Assigns an ID code required to refer the charge information Selection 4 digits 0000 through 9999 Default 1234 Programming 1 Enter 123 Display Charge ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display example Code 1234 3 Enter an ID code To delete the current entry press CLEA 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Charge Fee Reference 86 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 124 Hotel Application Description Assigns whether the hotel application is enabled or disabled Selection Enable Disable Default Disable Programming 1 Enter 124 Display Hotel Apply Asn 2 Press NEXT Display example Hotel Disable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 5 Press END A Conditions If Enabl
214. numbers Selection Emergency dial location number 1 through 8 Telephone number 16 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 009 Display Emergency Call 2 Press NEXT Display Emergency NO 3 Enter an emergency dial location numbe To enter emergency number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 9110 4 Enter a telephone numbe To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another emergency dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired emergency dial location numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of eight emergency call numbers Each number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 x F Flash P Pause and hyphen Norestriction is applied to emergency call numbers e For outside calls enter a line access number 9 81 through 88 before the phone number Emergency dial location number 1 8 corresponds to 100 Flexible Numbering No 55 62 General Programming 47 2 1 Manager Programming Features Guide References Emergency Call 48 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 010 Budget Management Description Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the extension basis Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 K
215. numbers Programmes 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night are used to set the toll restriction value for each COS Features Guide References Toll Restriction 124 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 306 310 T RS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Description These allow you to assign numbers which are exceptions to the toll restriction specified in programmes 301 through 305 as follows Programme 306 applies to level 2 Programme 307 applies to levels 2 through 3 Programme 308 applies to levels 2 through 4 Programme 309 applies to levels 2 through 5 Programme 310 applies to levels 2 through 6 Selection Default Location number 1 through 5 Exceptional number 7 digits max All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a programme address 306 through 310 Display example TRS Excp LVL 2 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Not Stored 4 Enter an exceptional number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END General Programming 125 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Conditions There is a maximum of five numbers
216. o press NEXT Display example 01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e The eXtra Device Port feature must be assigned Disable for console ports e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available General Programming 173 2 7 Extension Programming To assign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Immediately after changing your assignment the changed setting may not work for a maximum of eight seconds Features Guide References EXtra Device Port XDP 174 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 601 Class of Service Description Programmes each extension for Class of Service COS The COS determines the call handling abilities of each extension Primary and secondary COS numbers can be assigned per extension Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part COS number 1 through 8 Default All jacks 1 2 Primary Secondary COS 1 COS 1 Programming 1 Enter 601 Display COS Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO
217. oa srs soosi eene een oen 161 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 161 502 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit eee 163 503 Call Transfer to Outside Line eeeeeeeeeeee m nennen n a neni 165 504 Call Forwarding to Outside Line eese 166 505 Executive Busy Overrde ee teet ite O ee vee bane 167 506 Executive Busy Override Deny seseesssessssesseesressrrssersesssessessrrseessoesseesressessesseoesese 168 507 Do Not Disturb Override eec eet recente cerae eene e ee eee vast 169 508 Account Code Entry Modenos iriennerien e n E EEEE aas 170 509 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA eese eene ener 172 2 7 Extension Programming eee eee eese eene eee en sese tease teta aset eaae ee eae sese epe sete ease eta sese 173 600 BXtra Device Port eee te be ve cree ere erar 173 601 Class of Services 5e detto cro tetendit cott eoe s tede eeu rw eel ae ceto de ue Ci ene ee randa 175 602 Extension Group Assignment terere enne nnn en nennen enne 177 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night sess 179 605 606 X Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night 181 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night eene 183 609 Voice Mail Access Codes ccccccccccescssscscecscccccccescesssesesssecssacscecsesee
218. odify Added Number All modification tables Not stored 400 Outside Line Connection Assignment All outside lines Connect If KX TD290 is connected All outside lines in the Slave System No Connect DefaultValues 399 Programme Default 401 Outside Line Group Assignment COO01 TRG 1 COO02 TRG 2 CO03 TRG 3 CO04 TRG 4 CO05 TRG 5 CO06 TRG 6 CO07 TRG 7 COO08 TRG 8 for KX TD816 CO08 through CO54 TRG 8 for KX TD1232 402 Dial Mode Selection All outside lines Pulse 403 Pulse Speed Selection All outside lines 10 pps 404 DTMF Time All outside lines 80 ms 407 408 D IL 1 1 Extension Day Night All outside lines Disable Day Night 409 410 I ntercept Extension Day Night All outside line groups Disable Day Night 411 Host PBX Access Codes All outside line groups Not stored 412 Pause Time All outside line groups 4 5 s 413 Flash Time All outside line groups 96 ms 414 Disconnect Time All outside line groups 1 5 s 417 Outside Line Name Assignment All outside lines Not stored 423 Pay Tone Assignment All outside lines Disable 441 Line Hunting Sequence All outside line groups Small Large 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night COS 1 through 7 Level 1 Day Night COS 8 Level 7 Day Night 502
219. of eight Modification Tables each of which can be given a number of digits to be deleted Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS 134 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 33 ARS Modify Added Number Description Determines how the dialled number should be modified before transmitting to the central office Assigned numbers are added to the beginning of the dialled number Selection Modification table number 1 through 8 Number to be added 20 digits max Default All modification tables Not stored Programming 1 Enter 331 Display ARS Modify Add 2 Press NEXT Display Modify Table 3 Enter a modification table number To enter table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 4 Enter the number to be added To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another modification table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired modification table numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of eight Modification Tables each of which can be given a number to be added Each number has a maximum of 20 digits consisting of 0 through 9 xt and PAUSE Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS General Programming 135 2 5 Outside Line Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming
220. of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly single line telephones only Hold Hold 1 disconnection 10 Sets the duration of the DTMF signals 0 80 ms 0 Voice Mail sent to the VPS ports 1 160 ms Integration 12 11 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals such as a 01 1 0s Integration mailbox number to the VPS after the 10 1 5s VPS answers a call 11 2 0s 14 13 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals programmed in 01 1 0 5 Integration 113 to VPS after the VPS calls an 10 1 5s extension 11 2 0s 15 Assigns whether the system or the VPS 0 system 0 Message turns off the Message Waiting lamp 1 VPS Waiting when the user hears a message recorded Voice Mail in a mailbox Integration 16 Reserved 384 DECT Programming 5 4 Optional Programming is established just after dialling the feature number for accessing the following features Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Hold Retriev and Call Park Retrieve Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 02 1 Ifan outside party is transferred and 0 initiating 0 Call Transfer unanswered assigns whether Transfer extension Recall occurs at the transfer initiating 1 Operator 1 extension or at Operator 1 2 If the restriction of outside call duration 0 both calls 0 None i
221. of the charge fee reference Features Guide References Charge Fee Reference Display Message Station Message Detail Recording SMDR General Programming 83 2 2 System Programming 121 A ssignment of Denomination Description Assigns the Denomination required for your country Selection 2 characters Max Default Not stored Programming 1 Enter 121 Display Denomination 2 Press NEXT Display example Denomi KC 3 Enter a denomination To delete the current entry press CLEA To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new denomination To enter characters see Section 1 4Entering Characters Press STORE Press END Un A Conditions If more than two digits are entered they are ignored Features Guide References Display Message 84 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 122 Charge Verification Assignment Description Assigns the extension which is allowed to refer or clear for the call information on the extension outside line account code and the total Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Xzall jacks e Enable Disable Default All jacks Enable Programming 1 Enter 122 Display Charge Refer Ext 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT u
222. ogramme another TIE table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired TIE table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e The time the system waits for the confirmation wink signal can be programmed in programme 436 TIE Wink Time Out Assignment The system disconnects the outside line when the time out time expires To assign all TIE tables to one selection press the Xey in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for TIE table number 1 314 E amp M Programming 44 TIE Line Programming Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 315 4 4 TIE Line Programming 434 T IE Subscriber Number Removed Digit Description Assigns the removed digits of a received TIE subscriber number for each TIE table In this case digits are removed from the beginning of the received digits Selection TIE table number 1 through 4 e Number of digits to be deleted 0 through 6 02no deletion Default All TIE tables 0 Programming 1 Enter 434 Display TIE Remove Digit 2 Press NEXT Display Table NO 3 Enter a TIE table number To enter TIE table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 0 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another TIE table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired
223. on e PRI outside line CO number 25 through 54 Xll outside lines Outside line CO number 01 through 24 Default All outside lines PRI line CO 13 Programming 1 Enter 451 Display PRI Reference CO 2 Press NEXT Display CO NO 3 Enter the PRI outside line number Display example CO25 CO 13 A Enter the desired outside line number 5 Press STORE ISDN Programming 273 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Conditions Forthe KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master system and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all outside lines to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 25 Features Guide References None 274 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 452 453 I SDN Ring Service Assignment Day Night Description Assigns the ISDN service type for each ISDN port Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports DDI MSN Disable Default All ports Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 452 for day or 453 for night Display example ISDN Ring Day 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port numbe To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable Keep pressing SELECT until the desire
224. on Flexible Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and Consoles 40 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Description Assigns the jack number for a manager and or operators The manager extension can perfor System Programming The operators have the ability to perform operator services Selection e OPE 1 operator 1 OPE 2 operator 2 MNGER manager Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Default Operator 1 Jack 01 Operator 2 and Manager Not stored Programming 1 Enter 006 Display Operator Manage 2 Press NEXT to programme operator 1 Display OPE 1 Jack01 To programme another item you can also keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired one is displayed 3 Enter a jack number To assign no operator or manager press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number Press STORE To programme another item press NEXT or PREV Repeat steps 3 through 5 Press END NHN Mm RR Conditions e Up to two operators and a manager can be programmed e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available The manager cannot be assigned the jack number of the Console Port set in programme 00 7 Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment e Ifthe assigned jack is in eXtra Device Port XDP mode the proprie
225. on Number Assignment for Master CS Description Assigns the cell station number which is used for the master CS Selection Cell Station number KX TD816 RIF1 RIF2 RIF3 RIF4 RIF5 RIF6 KX TD1232 E1 RIFI E1 RIF2 E1 RIF3 E1 RIF4 E1 RIF5 E1 RIF6 E2 RIF1 E2 RIF2 E2 RIF3 E2 RIF4 E2 RIF5 E2 RIF6 E1 Cell Station Interface Unitl E2 Cell Station Interface Unit2 RIF1 Cell Stationl RIF2 Cell Station2 RIF3 Cell Station3 RIF4 Cell Station4 RIF5 Cell Station5 RIF6 Cell Station6 Default Not stored Programming 1 Enter 680 Display Master CS Assign 2 Press NEXT Display example M CS Not Stored 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Display example M CS E1 RIF1 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e For changing the assignment of the Master CS the assigned system programming data or radio information data should be cleared in programme 6 8 2 Radio Information Data Clear In this case the re registration of PSs is essential e CSs do not work without this assignment The Master CS must support GAP In case a CS doesn t support GAP the operation under this CS is not guaranteed except with a proprietary telephone Features Guide References None 380 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 681 PS Radio System ID Reference Description Shows a radio system ID which is required for each PS to recognise its
226. on Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 9 Assigns whether a new page is ejected 0 disable 0 Hotel Application or not when the Hotel Application is 1 enable printed out by SMDR 10 When Timed Reminder starts and is not 0 disable 1 Timed Reminder answered this programme enables or 1 enable disables the SMDR printout for Timed Reminder 11 Enables or disables to send a COLP 0 enable 1 COLP number 1 disable CLIR COLR 12 16 Reserved 388 DECT Programming 5 4 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 06 Sets the time after terminating the OGM 0 0s 58 m DISA OGM Determines whether the account code is printed out or not shown in dots by the SMDR shown in dots shown a SMDR 3 5 Reserved Selects the result when an outside call is routed by Call Forwarding to a voice mail port which is in the AA service mode For both Inband and DPT Integration disable AA service mode enable The mode will change to the VM service mode and a Follow On ID is sent When the voice mail port is in the VM service mode this programme will not be affected e disable enable m Voice Mail Integration Selects the result when an outside call is routed to a voice mail port by IRNA For both Inband and DPT Integration When th
227. ontinuous 220 TIE First Inter Digit Time 10s 340 TIE Line Routing Table All locations Not stored 341 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added Dial All locations Deleted digit 0 Added Dial Blank 431 TIE Table Number Assignment All outside line groups Not stored 432 TIE Incoming Assignment All TIE tables Wink 433 TIE Outgoing Assignment All TIE tables Wink 434 TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit All TIE tables 0 404 Default Values Programme Default 435 TIE Added Number All TIE tables Blank 436 TIE Wink Time Out Assignment All TIE tables 16 437 Outside to TIE Transfer All outside line groups Disable 438 TIE to Outside Transfer All outside line groups Disable 439 TIE to TIE Transfer All outside line groups Enable 440 TIE Security Type All outside line groups Trunk 442 Voice Path Type All outside lines 2 wire 443 Voice Level Transmit All outside lines 3 db 444 Voice Level Receive All outside lines 3 db 445 TIE Receive Dial All outside line ports Yes 811 DISA TIE User Codes All DISA TIE user code numbers DISA TIE user code Blank COS number 8 990 System Additional Information See Default shown in the explanation table 5 DECT Programming Programme Default 020 PS Flexible CO Button Assignment All PSs CO 0
228. oor opener 55 ISDN Programming 237 3 2 System Programming Feature Number List Number Feature Default 38 External feature access 6 39 Station feature clear 790 40 Message waiting 70 41 Outgoing message 36 42 Call forwarding Do not disturb 710 43 Call pickup deny 720 44 Data line security 730 45 Call waiting OHCA Whisper OHCA 731 46 Executive busy override deny 733 47 Pickup dialling 74 48 Absent message 750 49 Timed reminder 76 50 Electronic station lockout TI 51 Night service mode 78 52 Parallel telephone mode 39 53 Background music external 35 54 Reserved 55 62 Emergency call 1 through 8 None 63 Timed reminder remote 7 64 Call log incoming 56 65 Call log lock incoming 57 66 Check out ready 736 67 TIE line access number None 68 83 Other PBX Extension 01 through 16 None 84 LCS password set cancel 799 85 Log in log out 45 86 SXDP 48 87 CLIP COLP 711 88 Reserved 89 MCID 731 238 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming Selection Selection number 01 through 89 See Feature Number List for the corresponding features Feature number 1 or 2 digits for selection numbers 01 through 16 68 through 83 1 through 3 digits for selection numbers 17 through 67 84 through 89 Default See Feature Number List Programming 1 Enter 100 Displ
229. ormat Page length 66 Skip perforation 0 802 System Data Printout Not applicable 803 Music Source Use Hold and BGM Music 1 804 External Pager BGM All external pagers Disable 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone On 806 807 S erial Interface RS 232C Port 1 Port 2 Parameters New line code CR LF Baud rate 9600 Word length 8 Parity bit Mark Stop bit 1 809 DISA Security Type Trunk Default Values 401 Programme Default 810 DISA Tone Detection Enable 811 DISA TIE User Codes All DISA TIE user code numbers DISA TIE user code Blank COS number 8 812 DISA DTMF Repeat Dial and Call Repeat 813 Floating Number Assignment Pager 12196 Pager 22197 Pager 32296 Pager 42297 DISA 12198 DISA 22298 MODEM 299 DTA 199 E Grp 12191 E Grp 22192 E Grp 32193 E Grp 42194 E Grp 52291 E Grp 62292 E Grp 72293 E Grp 82294 814 Modem Standard CCITT 815 SMDR Output Mode Regular 817 KX TD197 Baud Rate Set V 34 33600 818 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Disable Number 990 System Additional Information See Default shown in the explanation table 991 COS Additional Information Bits 4 3 2 and 1 All COS 0000 Bit 5 All COS 1 3 ISDN Programming Programme Default 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment KX TD816 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 Single CO 01 throug
230. orwarding No Answer Time 3 rings 203 Intercept Time 12 rings 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time ls 205 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration 10 min Time 206 Outside to Outside Line Call Duration 10 min Time 207 First Digit Time 10s 208 Inter Digit Time 10s 398 Default Values Programme Default 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 10 times 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time 60 s 211 Dial Start Time 500 ms 212 Call Duration Count Start Time Os 213 DISA Delayed Answer Time 1 ring 214 DISA Prolong Time 3 min 215 Outgoing Message Tim 32 0 32 0 for OGM 1 through 4 from left to right 216 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 10 min 217 Timed Reminder Alarm Repeat Times 3 times 218 Timed Reminder Alarm Interval Time 60 s 221 DISA AA Wait Time ls 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialling Disable 301 305 T RS Denied Code Entry for Levels through 6 2AII locations Not stored 2 through 6 306 310 T RS Excepted Code Entry for LevelsAll locations Not stored 312 ARS Mode Off 313 ARS Time Time A 8 00 AM Time B 5 00 PM Time C 9 00 PM Time D Disable 314 321 A RS Leading Digit Entry for Plans through 8 1All locations Not stored 322 329 A RS Routing Plans 1 through 8 All time schedules Not stored 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit All modification tables 0 331 ARS M
231. pl lay example 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Message Waiting Time Interval 10 min 118 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 217 Timed Reminder Alarm Repeat Times Description Sets the number of times Timed Reminder alarm is tried Selection Number of times 1 through 5 Default 3 times Programming 1 Enter 217 Display Alarm Times 2 Press NEXT Display example Attempt 3 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions One attempt is equivalent to 30 seconds Features Guide References Timed Reminder General Programming 119 2 3 Timer Programming 218 Timed Reminder Alarm Interval Time Description Sets the Timed Reminder alarm interval time Selection Time seconds 30 through 240 Default 60 s Programming 1 Enter 218 Display Alarm Interval 2 Press NEXT Display example Interval 60 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Timed Reminder Hotel Application 120 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 221 DISA AA Wait Time Description Sets the number of seconds the sys
232. play Location NO 3 Enter a location numbe To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 4 Enter a TIE line access numbe To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press gt rogramme the outside line group hunt sequence number 6 Enter an outside line group hunt sequence numbe To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location numbe 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 E amp M Programming 307 4 3 TIE Line Routing Table Programming 10 Press END Conditions Each TIE line access number has a maximum of three digits consisting of 0 through 9 and X The character X can be used as a wild card character e Programme 341 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added Dial is used to modify the TIE line access number Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service 308 E amp M Programming 4 3 TIE Line Routing Table Programming 341 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added Dial Description Assigns the removed digits and added numbers of a received TIE call Digits are removed and added from the beginning of the dialled digits Selection Location number 01 through 32 e Number of digits to be deleted 0 through 4 0 no deletio
233. ple for the KX TD1232 Unit 1 Data port jack 02 MW port 1 single line telephone jack 01 2 MW port 3 single line telephone jack 05 2 Unit 4 Data port jack 33 MW port 2 single line telephone jack 34 2 MW port 6 single line telephone jack 35 1 A single line telephone jack cannot be assigned to more than one unit Features Guide References Message Waiting General Programming 101 2 3 Timer Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 200 H old Recall Time Description Assigns the length of the hold recalltimer This timer is used to alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period of time Selection Time seconds 0 through 240 O Hold Recall disabled Default 60 s Programming 1 Enter 200 Display Hold Recall Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 60 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Select 0 if Hold Recall is not required e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Call Hold 102 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time Description Sets the number of rings before transfer recall occurs If a transferred call is not answered after the programmed number of rings the call returns to the original caller Selection Number of rings 3 through 48 Default 12 rings Programming 1 Enter 201
234. ption The TIE outgoing method can be set to the wink mode in programme 433 TIE Outgoing Assignment This programme sets the time the system waits for the confirmation wink signal after an outside line is seized according to your central office service The system disconnects the outside line when the time out expires Selection TIE table number 1 through 4 lt all TIE tables Time 1 through 127 X 64 milliseconds is the actual time Default All TIE tables 16 Programming 1 Enter 436 Display TIE Wink Timeout 2 Press NEXT Display Table NO 3 Enter a TIE table number To enter TIE table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 16 4 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another TIE table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired TIE table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty Toassign all TIE tables to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for TIE table number 1 318 E amp M Programming 44 TIE Line Programming Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 319 4 4 TIE Line Programming 437 O utside to TIE Transfer Description Enables or disables transferring an incoming outside call to the TIE line on an outside l
235. ptional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 02 7 An outside line set to pulse or call 0 60 0 Dial Type blocking mode in programme 1 67 96 Selection 402 D ial Mode Selection can have two settings This assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing Select an appropriate ratio depending on the standard in your country 8 Determines whether an extension 0 extension 0 Voice Mail mailbox number is substituted by the number Integration extension number or it is programmable 1 free free If a call is forwarded or rerouted to the VPS this system automatically transmits the mailbox number to the VPS to specify the user s mailbox To make it programmable select 1 free then assign the number in programme 609 Vace Mail Access Codes and 665 P S Voice Mail Access Codes 9 Determines the initial display of a 0 names 0 Call Directory digital display proprietary telephone 1 numbers except for KX T7230 in Station Speed Dialling 10 Reserved 12 11 Selects inter digit pause for pulse 00 630 ms 01 None dialling 01 830 ms 10 1030 ms 13 Selects intercom dial tone frequency 0 normal 0 None 1 distinctive 14 Reserved 15 Sets the maximum time for detecting a 0 1000 ms 0 None hooking signal from a single line 1 136 ms telephone 16 Reserved E amp M Programming 333 4 6 Optional Programming
236. puter System Programming with Proprietary Telephone General Programming 67 2 2 System Programming 108 O ne Touch Transfer by DSS Button Description Enables or disables the function of automatically holding the outside call when a DSS button on the console or proprietary telephone is pressed Selection Enable Disable Default Enable Programming 1 Enter 108 Display DSS Auto Hold 2 Press NEXT Display example Auto HLD Enable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Call Transfer 68 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Description Assigns the type of expansion units to be used in the system This allows the system to identify the unit in each expansion unit location Selection KX TD816 e Areas 1 2 C 4 CO S1 280 S2 6 S0 EM 4 E amp M E EXT A 16 SLT D No Use KX TD1232 Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 C 4 CO S1 2 S0 S2 6 S0 S3 1 PRI EM 4 E amp M E1 8 EXT1 E2 8 EXT2 A1 16 SLTI A2 16 SLT2 D No Use Master system only S3 E1 and E2 for the KX TD144 or KX TD146 Default KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT Display example Master C E Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selectio
237. r Setanar nni a a E A E 373 672 BS Bassword Set ssc chr r a a t et tide been e 375 673 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for PS 00 0 0 cc eeccceccecenceeeeceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeetaeeesaes 376 676 PS Incoming Call Display eene nennen 378 680 Cell Station Number Assignment for Master CS sse 380 681 PS Radio System ID Referente neneiia i aE EE 381 682 Radio Information Data Clear eese ene enne nennen nen 382 5 4 Optional Programming eee ee ee eee eene eee ene see tn ae ee eb eset eaae tease see ea esee ea ae ee ea esee eaa 383 990 System Additional Information esses eene enne nennen 213 6 Default Values e sseeoosossoooosssessssssoesosscessssssossssscessssssessssssesssssss JJS TAE VIL TRO INTUS iri Table of Contents Section Programming Instructions Programming Instructions 9 1 1 Programming Instructions 1 1 Programming Instructions Default Setting This system has a default factory setting If any of the programming needs to be changed you will find the necessary information in the Features Guide This makes the system very simple to install and customise as required by the customer Any required changes can be written in Programming Tables Required Telephone Set One of the following telephone sets is required for System Programming Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT KX T7536 KX T7533 KX T7531
238. r disables the dial tone 0 disable 1 None between obtaining an outside line and 1 enable dialling the phone number when using the one touch dial redial or speed dial function 9 Result of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly single line telephones only Hold Hold 1 disconnection 10 Sets the duration of the DTMF signals 0 80 ms 0 Voice Mail sent to the VPS ports 1 160 ms Integration 12 11 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals such as a 01 1 0s Integration mailbox number to the VPS after the 10 1 5s VPS answers a call 11 2 0s 14 13 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals programmed in 01 1 0 5 Integration 113 to VPS after the VPS calls an 10 1 5s extension 11 2 0s 15 Assigns whether the system or the VPS 0 system 0 Message turns off the Message Waiting lamp 1 VPS Waiting when the user hears a message recorded Voice Mail in a mailbox Integration 16 Reserved 286 ISDN Programming 3 5 Optional Programming is established just after dialling the feature number for accessing the following features Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Hold Retriev and Call Park Retrieve Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 02 1 Ifan outside party is transferred and 0 initiating 0 Call Transfer unanswere
239. ra mme 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This programme sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent to an outside line to DTMF mode Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 XIl outside lines Time milliseconds 80 160 Default All outside lines 80 ms Programming 1 Enter 404 Display DTMF Time Press NEXT Display CO Line NO Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 80msec Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 The DTMF time required is determined by the outside line or PBX line 144 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming Features Guide References Dial Type Selection General Programming 145 2 5 Outside Line Programming 407 408 D IL 1 1 Extension Day Night Description The Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 feature allows incoming out
240. ramme 205 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Time expires Extensions in limited classes cannot establish an outside to outside call that is cannot transfer forward an outside call to another outside line or perform an Unattended Conference e Joassign all COS to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 bit 2 is used to programme limited call duration to be done for outgoing calls only General Programming 163 2 6 COS Programming Features Guide References Call Forwarding Call Transfer Conference 164 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 503 CallTransfer to Outside Line Description This programme determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform the Call Transfer to Outside Line function Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Enable Disable Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 503 Display Transfer to CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one sele
241. ramming 618 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension Description Assigns a CLIP COLP number for each ISDN extension port Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports CLIP COLP number 16 digits max Default All ports Not stored Programming 1 Enter 618 Display CLIP for I EXT 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port numbe To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a CLIP COLP number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Each CLIP COLP number consists of 0 through 9 e FortheKX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available Toassign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 ISDN Programming 283 3 4 Extension Programming Features Guide References Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP 284 ISDN Programming 3 5 Optional Programming 3 5 Optional Programming 990 System Additional Information Description Allows the following programming items
242. registered PBX Selection None Default Not stored Programming 1 Enter 681 Display Radio Sys ID SET 2 Press NEXT Before a Radio System ID is assigned Display Not Stored After a Radio System ID is assigned Display example 00123456 3 Press END Conditions e The radio system ID must be assigned to support the DECT system KX TD144 TD146 KX TD142 If not only the wired extension port of the KX TD144 can be used e If the radio system ID is not assigned properly the registered PS may not work properly Features Guide References None DECT Programming 381 5 3 Extension Programming 682 R adio Information Data Clear Description Clears the assigned radio information data Selection None Default Not applicable Programming 1 Enter 682 Display Radio DATA Clear 2 Press NEXT Display example Clear OK 3 Press STORE 4 Press END Conditions The data regarding following system programmings is cleared 65 OJPS Registration 67 2 PS Password Set Features Guide References None 382 DECT Programming 5 4 Optional Programming 5 4 Optional Programming 990 System Additional Information Description Allows the following programming items to be changed if required Each bit in each Area represents a programming item Chart for the Areas and Bits Bit Number 10 918 m Nn m Un Em EN Em w Em N Em Em Em Display
243. registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 12 4 Enter the doorphone number To not assign a doorphone press CLEA To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new doorphone number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 doorphone 1 2 are installed in the Master System and 3 4 in the Slave if available e You can enter two KX TD816 or up to four KX TD1232 doorphone numbers for each extension DECT Programming 369 5 3 Extension Programming Features Guide References Door Opener Doorphone Call Night Service 370 DECT Programming 5 3 Extension Programming 665 PS Voice Mail Access Codes Description Assigns a mailbox number for each PS only if programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 bit 8 is set to free Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Mailbox number 16 digits max Default All PSs Not stored Programming 1 Enter 665 Display PS VM ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 3 Enter the PS registration numbe You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Not Stored 4 Enter the mail
244. rent entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available ISDN Programming 233 3 1 Manager Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Extension 234 ISDN Programming 3 1 Manager Programming 014 Budget Management on ISDN Port Description Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the ISDN extension port basis Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports Charge limitation Charge 0 through 59999 Default All ports 0 Programming 1 Enter 014 Display ISDN Charge Lim 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port numbe To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 0 4 Enter a charge limitation To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e If the charge limitation is set 0 no restriction is applied To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the
245. ring a jack number Display example 01 1 1234 4 Enter the doorphone numbers To assign no doorphone press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new doorphone numbers 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available General Programming 183 2 7 Extension Programming e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods Toassign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Two doorphones can be installed For the KX TD1232 doorphones 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e You can enter up to two for KX TD816 or four for KX TD1232 doorphone numbers for each extension Features Guide References Door Opener Doorphone Call Night Service 184 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 609 Voice Mail Access Codes Description Assigns a mailbox number for each extension only if programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 bit 8 is set to free Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64
246. ring an outside call single 1 disconnection line telephones only 3 Result of pressing the FLASH button on 0 disconnection 0 External proprietary telephones during an signal Feature Access outside call External Feature Access is 1 External Feature e Flash effective only during a call via an Access analogue outside line 4 7 Reserved 8 Enables or disables the dial tone 0 disable 1 None between obtaining an outside line and 1 enable dialling the phone number when using the one touch dial redial or speed dial function 9 Result of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly single line telephones only Hold Hold 1 disconnection 10 Sets the duration of the DTMF signals 0 80 ms 0 Voice Mail sent to the VPS ports 1 160 ms Integration 12 11 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5 s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals such as a 01 1 0s Integration mailbox number to the VPS after the 10 1 5s VPS answers a call 11 2 0s 14 13 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5 s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals programmed in 01 1 0 5 Integration 113 to VPS after the VPS calls an 10 1 5s extension 11 2 0s 15 Assigns whether the system or the VPS 0 system 0 Message turns off the Message Waiting lamp 1 VPS Waiting when the user hears a message recorded Voice Mail in a mailbox Integration 16 Reserved 2 4 General Programming 2 9 Optional Programming
247. ription Assigns the destination of each Direct Dialling In DDI number in the day and night modes Selection Location number 000 through 399 e Extension number 2 through 4 digits 0 the same as 990 Area 5 bits 7 and 8 assignments Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a programme address 151 for day or 152 for night Display example DDI Ring Day 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 3 Enter a location numbe To enter location number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter an extension number or 0 Display example 000 EXT 201 To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Each extension number can be 2 through 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 When 0 is assigned the incoming DDI number is sent to the destination assigned in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 5 bits 7 and 8 To assign a destination location of incoming DDI numbers select DDI in programme 452 4 53 ISDN Ring Service Assignment Day Night first e Assignable extension numbers are programmed in the following programmes Extension numbers 0 03 Extension Number Set 246 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming ISDN exten
248. rogramming 426 I SDN Configuration Description Assigns the configuration on an ISDN port basis This programme is available for ISDN extensions only Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X X all ports Point point to point Multipoint point to multipoint Default KX TD816 Ports 05 and 06 Multipoint Other ports Point KX TD1232 All ports Point Programming 1 Enter 426 Display Access Mode 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Point 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Forthe KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e If one equipment is connected to the ISDN port select Point If multiple equipment are connected select Multipoint Toassign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 258 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming e After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment is effective Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network
249. rogramming Conditions Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 the Xnd keys and the FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons To store a flash signal press FLASH Note The stored flash will only be effective during a call Refer to External Feature Access in the Features Guide To store a hyphen press the button To store a pause press PAUSE Refer to Pause Insertion Automatic in the Features Guide To store a feature number to convert pulse signals to DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals press the and keys Refer to Pulse to Tone Conversion in the Features Guide To prevent displaying of all or part of the number press SECRET before and after the secret number Secret Dialling If you are storing an external number include the line access number default 9 81 through 88 before the number When dialling a pause is automatically inserted after the line access number If you are storing an account code enter the account code before the line access number Refer to Account Code Entry in the Features Guide e f you are storing a number for Incoming Outside Call Information Display with name enter hyphen after the line access number The system starts to compare the calling party s number or called party s number with the System Speed Dialling number stored after Example 9 12345678 Refer to Incoming Out
250. roup number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group number 1 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service 322 E amp M Programming 44 TIE Line Programming 440 TIE Security Type Description Assigns the security mode for TIE calls There are two modes Non Security and Trunk Security Outside line security Non Security mode allows the caller to access an outside line without dialling a TIE user code Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE User Code assigned in programme 811 D ISA TIE User Codes before making a TIE call Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 ull outside line groups Non Non security Trunk Outside line security Default All outside line groups Trunk Programming 1 Enter 440 Display TIE Security 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group numbe To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Trunk 4 Keep pressing SELECT un
251. roups For example you can move between the programme addresses of the largest OX X and 100 the largest 1XX and 200 and so on Also you can move between the smallest programme address 000 and the largest one 9 XX Method 2 is useful when you wish to jump to another programme address For example you have just finished with programme 006 and now you want to go to programme 301 Neither SKP VOLUME V nor SKP VOLUME is convenient in this case So you should press END and enter 301 Note The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the programming mode and that you will use Method b Confirming the entries You may review the stored programming without making any changes Going back to the operation mode Two ways are available to go back to the operation mode a Lift the handset while in programming mode b When the Initial Message SYS PGM NO displayed press the PROGRAM or PAUSE button Todisplay the Initial Message press END 16 Programming Instructions 1 4 Entering Characters 1 4 Entering Characters Entering Characters You can enter characters to store names or messages by using the dialling key pad buttons or the Jog Dial See the Combination Tables below Combination Table a SHIFT SHIFT SELECT button pressing times A uzcoUoP O s o 3 joo vo o X C O ZI XIrImiosN xxic oils5ix j o o N
252. ry is now stored The indicator lights red and a confirmation tone lets you know that storage is completed Programming Instructions 23 1 6 Programming Example Sample of Description Explanation 6 To programme another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 8 Press END 9 18 Conditions Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 and keys FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons a9 Features Guide References a5 6 16 T l T 1 1 1 1 l 1 I l l l l 1 1 f 1 1 1 l i 1 I I I l I l 1 1 1 1 l l 1 j 1 1 1 l i I l l l 1 15 Select the best way for you to store another speed dial number Pressing the NEXT PREV allows you to select the next higher lower speed dial number You can also keep pressing them until the desired one is displayed If you press SELECT and the desired speed dial number the selected code is displayed 16 You can continue to programme another entry 17 After you have stored all your entries finish this programme by pressing END After pressing END you can go to any programme address you desire You can return to the Initial Message mode any time by pressing END To go to the next larger programme address do not press EN
253. s Button Flexible DECT Programming 343 5 2 System Programming 5 2 System Programming 100 F lexible Numbering Description Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature numbers for system features Feature Number List Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 1 02 2nd hundred extension block 2 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call 0 18 Automatic line access ARS 9 19 Outside line group line access 8 20 System speed dialling x 21 Station speed dialling 3x 22 Station speed dialling programming 30 23 Doorphone call 31 24 Paging external 32 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 33 27 Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup outside line 4 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve outside line 53 34 Last number redial 35 Call park Call park retrieve 52 36 Account code entry 49 37 Door opener 55 344 DECT Programming 5 2 System Programming Feature Number List Number Feature Default 38 External feature access 6 39 Station feature clear 790 40 Message waiting 70 41 Outgoing message 36 42 Call forwarding Do not disturb 710 43 Call pickup deny 720 44 Data line security 730
254. s Call Identification MCID supplementary service ETS 300 182 Advice of Charge AOC supplementary service Digital Signalling Syste No one DSS1 protocol Section 4 E amp M Programming Provides details about the system programmings required to use E amp M TIE lines Section 5 DECT Programming Provides details about the system programmings required to use the wireless system with a DECT portable station Section 6 Default Values Provides the list of default values for all programmings Section 7 Index Provides the programming titles important words and phrases to help you access the required information easily About the other manuals Along with this Programming Guide the following manuals are available to help you install know the available features and use the KX TD816 KX TD1232 system Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and optional equipment Features Guide Provides information about the system features 2 Introduction User Manual Provides operating instructions for the end users using proprietary telephones single line telephones consoles or DECT portable stations Introduction Table of Contents 1 Programming Instructions ecce eeee esee ee eene eere eee eeessseees D 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 Programming Instructions eee ecce eee eee eee eee esee etas e see eae set ea ae ee eae set ta aset eaae se
255. s NEXT Display Area NO 3 Enter an area code 01 through 08 Display example 0010100011000001 A Keep pressing m gt or amp to move the cursor to the desired bit Un Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and enter the new selection To programme another bit repeat steps 4 and 5 Press STORE To programme another area press SELECT and the desired area code o0 1 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END E amp M Programming 339 4 6 Optional Programming Conditions None Features Guide References None 340 E amp M Programming Section DECT Programming DECT Programming 341 5 1 Manager Programming 5 1 Manager Programming 020 P S Flexible CO Button Assignment Description Used to determine how the flexible CO buttons are used on PSs Selection PSregistration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Flexible CO button number 1 through 3 Button Code plus parameter if required Button Code Parameter 0 Single CO KX TD816 01 through 08 Outside line number KX TD1232 01 through 54 Outside line number 1 DSS 2 through 4 digits Extension number 2 One Touch Dialling 16 digits max Telephone number 3 Message Waiting None 4 FWD DND None 5 Save None 6 Account None 7 Conference None 82 Voice Mail Transfer
256. s NEXT Display example TRG1 4 5sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all outside line groups to one selection press the Xey in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 e Programme 401 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign each outside line to an outside line group Features Guide References Host PBX Access Pause Insertion Automatic 152 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 413 Flash Time Description Assigns the length of the flash time If your system is installed behind a host PBX External Feature Access EFA is necessary to obtain their services To enable it select a required hooking signal sending time for the outside line group Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X Xll outside line groups Time milliseconds Disable no EFA 80 96 112 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Default All outside line groups 96 ms Programming 1 Enter 413 Display TRG Flash Time 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example
257. s SELECT for AM or PM 17 Press STORE 18 Press END Conditions After changing an entry you can press STORE You do not have to perform the rest of the steps e To return to a previous field press in steps 4 through 9 and steps 13 through 16 f you hear an alarm after pressing STORE check that the date is valid Theclock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed Youcannot leave an entry empty Features Guide References Display Message General Programming 29 2 1 Manager Programming 001 S ystem Speed Dialling Number Set Description Used to programme the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users There are 500 numbers available from 000 to 499 Selection Speed dial number 000 through 499 Telephone number 24 digits max Default All speed dial numbers Not stored Programming 1 Enter 001 Display SPD Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END 30 General Programming 2 1 Manager P
258. s STORE 6 To programme another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Speed dial numbers are programmed in programme 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set To go to another speed dial number in step 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 32 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming Features Guide References Call Directory System Speed Dialling General Programming 33 2 1 Manager Programming 003 E xtension Number Set Description Assigns an extension number to each extension Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part Extension Number 2 through 4 digits Default KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 101 through 116 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 201 through 216 KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 101 through 164 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 201 through 264 Programming 1 Enter 003 Display EXT Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display 01 1 EXT101 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or S
259. s enabled in programme 1 outgoing calls 502 E xtension to Outside Line Call only Duration Limit assigns if the restriction is done for both outgoing and incoming calls or for outgoing calls only 3 _ Allows you to remove confirmation tone 0 disable 1 Confirmation 4 By default a beep tone sounds when 1 enable Tone a three party conference is started ended 4 Determines if the dialled X and 0 no check 1 Toll Restriction will be checked byToll Restriction This 1 check assignment is required for certain central offices CO to prevent toll fraud Some COs ignore the user dialled X and f If your CO is such a type select 0 no check 5 Enables or disables the Flash function 0 disable 0 Flash when an outside call is received at a 1 enable locked or toll restricted station Flash if enabled allows the user to make an outside call using the same line If 0 disconnection signal is selected in Area 01 bit 3 above this 1s also allowed for those extensions that have the Account Code Verified All Calls mode assigned 6 Allows you to remove confirmation tone 0 disable 1 Confirmation 3 This tone is sent when a conversation 1 enable Tone DECT Programming 385 5 4 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 02 7 An outside line set to pulse or call 0 60
260. s programmed for jack 01 Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 190 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout Description Used to determine which calls will produce a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printout Selection Outgoing calls All all calls Toll toll calls only Off no printing Incoming calls On all calls Off no printing Default Outgoing calls All Incoming calls On Programming 1 Enter 800 Display Duration Log 2 Press NEXT to programme outgoing calls Display Outgoing All 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to programme incoming calls Display Incoming On 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 8 Press END Conditions tis necessary to connect a printer to the Serial Interface RS 232C port provided on the system After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer within 10 seconds Otherwise the usage of the Serial Interface port is changed to syste programming and printing will not occur f Toll is selected the system will print out all the calls starting from the numbers stored in programmes 301 3 0 5 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 General
261. seceseeceeeeeaeeeseceeaeceaceceaeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 248 41 9 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment cee eere 250 42 1 ISDN DDI MSN Removed Digit Added Number Assignment 252 42 4 ISDN Port Types innere deterret beer eene ni erg ER rena 254 42 5 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode sssssseesseeeeeeeee nennen entente nere 256 42 OPISDN Configuration ceo terrre ret rere easi obe he Reda 258 42 7 ISDN Data Link Mode sees ene en eene nennen eene 260 42 S SON TE Modemai ete eee et ee iier teet net Een EE neg 262 42 9 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number eere 264 43 OJISDN Extension Progress Tone eeseseseeseeeeeneeenne enne enne enne 266 44 MSN Assignment dore Hee rte eret ee rer rhet eee tte rte ee A eei se PE oat 268 448 4 49 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN esse 270 45 O PRT COnfrPUFatlOT cries erect ener oett che vaca c et ern eie eH e rie Peers 272 45 T PRI Reference OR aane ter dee 273 452 4 53 ISDN Ring Service Assignment Day Night sene 275 3 4 Extension Programming eee eee eee ee eene ee ee eae seta ae eaae seen e seta ae teens ee eaae toas osea 277 lot SITSIDN Glassxof Service o ertet aree o eee hne penna enero en etes ee tee ov eve Pn ea en Pp chet 277 614 6 15 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Nig
262. side Call Information Display in the Features Guide A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by storing it in two speed dial numbers The line access number should be stored in the first speed dial number e To access another speed dial number in step 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 e To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press wi amp m e Programme 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set is used to name the speed dial numbers Features Guide References Call Directory System Speed Dialling General Programming 31 2 1 Manager Programming 002 S ystem Speed Dialling Name Set Description Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program me 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set KX T7531 KX T7533 KX T7536 KX T7433 KX T7436 and KX T7235 telephones can show the stored name during System Speed Dialling Selection Speed dial number 000 through 499 Name 10 characters max Default All speed dial numbers Not stored Programming 1 Enter 002 Display SPD Name Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEA To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Pres
263. side calls to be directed to a specific extension When an outside line is assigned as DIL 1 1 it is necessary to assign the destination These programmes specify the extension number for day or night mode Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no DIL 1 1 Default All outside lines Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 407 for day or 408 for night Display example DIL 1 1 Asn Day 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Enter an extension numbe To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To disable DIL 1 1 press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available Outside line numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable 146 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside l
264. sion numbers 01 2 ISDN Extension Number Set Voice Mail extension numbers 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Phantom extension numbers 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Floating numbers 8 13 Floating Number Assignment PS extension number 6 7 1 PS Extension Number Set Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDI Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 247 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 418 I SDN Line Number Assignment Description Assigns your ISDN network line telephone number Your telephone number is sentto the called party with the CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation feature and to the calling party with the COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation feature offered by the ISDN network service Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 54 Telephone number 16 digits max Default All outside lines Not stored Programming 1 Enter 418 Display ISDN CO NO 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone numbe To delete the current entry press CLEA To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired o
265. speed dial numbers Not stored 6 Programming 7 1 Enter 001 Display SPD Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code 00 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT 11 Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 1 Programme address 2 Programme title 3 Provides a more detailed description of the programme 4 Shows you choices that you can assign 5 Shows you the default factory setting 6 Shows you programming procedures step by step While programming use the overlay Before starting to programme enter the programming mode See Entering the programming mode in Section 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones 7 Enter the programme address 8 The display shows the programme title If your telephone has soft buttons the lower line shows the functions that are currently assigned to them 9 Press either Soft 3 NEXT shown on the display or the NEXT shown on the overlay 10 The message line advises you to enter a speed dial number 11 If the telephone number has already been stored the number is displayed 12 Enter the telephone number that you want to store Your entry is displayed as you enter the digits 13 Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry 14 Your ent
266. splay shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Features Guide References Call Pickup Extension Group Paging Station Hunting 178 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 603 604 D IL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Description The Direct In Lines DIL 1 N feature can be assigned to ring more than one extension All incoming calls from the programmed outside lines are directed to the specified extensions These programmes assign the extensions and the notification method for each outside line in both day and night modes Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 x 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 Xll outside lines e Disab disable Immdt immediate ringing IRN 1 ring delay 3RNG 3 ring delay 6RNG 6 ring delay NoRNG no ring Default All jacks 1 2 All outside lines Immediate ringing Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 603 for day or 604 for night Display example DIL 1 N Asn Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 CO01 Immdt 4 Enter the outside line number You can also keep pressing Sunti e des
267. ss END Conditions e Up to three outside line groups and modification plans can be assigned for each time schedule The outside line group number and modification table number must be entered together The highest priority outside line group number and modification table number is entered first left to right e Programmes 3 30 ARS Modify Removed Digit and 3 31 ARS Modify Added Number are used to make up the eight Modification Tables Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS General Programming 133 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 330 A RS Modify Removed Digit Description Determines how the dialled number should be modified before transmitting to the central office You can delete the digits from the beginning of the dialled number Selection Modification table number 1 through 8 e Number of digits to be deleted 0 through 9 02no deletion Default All modification tables 0 Programming 1 Enter 330 Display ARS Modify Remov 2 Press NEXT Display Modify Table 3 Enter a modification table numbe To enter table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 0 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another modification table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired modification table numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum
268. ssage waiting light number Display example MW LAMP NO 12 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e The available message waiting light patterns are as follows 98 General Programming 2 2 System Programming Pattern 01 Pattern 02 Pattern 03 Pattern 04 Pattern 05 Pattern 06 Pattern 07 I Pattern 08 1 Pattern 09 Pattern 10 Pattern 11 Pattern 12 5 sec Y L 1 I a 1 11 25 sec I I I I 1500 msec i i i i 1 1250 msec l I 1 l 1 ey I 1250 msec 250 msec 1 I I l I Lo EN 1 1500 msec 500 msec I 10 a sec i i 1 ee msec 20 0 sec 3 L l I I 1 1250 msec l i 5 sec zi 1 I Len Gade 8 I 11 25 sec 1 25 sec 1 l l l 1 __ 3 I 1500 msec 500 msec 1 I I I I L I 1250 msec 250 msec I i i 1 I 500 msec 500 msec 11 25 sec 1 25 sec 1 25 sec 1 25 sec l t550 msec 250 msec Features Guide References Message Waiting General Programming 99 2 2 System Programming 156 M essage Waiting Port Set Description Assigns which single line telephone port is connected to the KX TD194 port Selection Unit TD194 number KX TD816 1 KX TD1232 1 through 6 Message waiting port number 01 through 16 Single line telephone jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Sub port number 1 or 2 1 main port 2 XDP single line telephone port Default All units All message wait
269. stinctive features such as Call Waiting 14 Enables or disables the Whisper OHCA 0 any telephone 1 Whisper OHCA feature 1 KX T7500 and KX T7400 series telephone only 15 16 Reserved 292 ISDN Programming 3 5 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 07 1 3 Reserved 4 Allows to access an outside line has the 0 enable 1 Outside Line lowest number among idle lines with 1 disable Access priority Automatic 5 Reserved 6 Selects the result when a DISA DDI 0 reorder tone is 1 None MSN TIE call is invalid sent 1 IRNA 7 Selects the result when a DISA DDI 0 IRNA 1 None MSN TIE call arrives at a busy 1 busy tone is extension which has disabled Call sent Waiting 8 Selects the forwarding destination when 0 destination of 1 Call Forwarding an outside call is transferred from an intercom calls extension or the VPS to an extension 1 destination of where the Call Forwarding has been set incoming outside calls 9 Selects the result when the first digit 0 disconnect 1 None timer or the inter digit timer used for toll 1 do not restriction checking assigned in disconnect programme 207 Fi rst Digit Time or 208 I nter Digit Time expires 10 Enables or disables retry by diall ingx 0 dial X 1 DISA during DISA outside to outside
270. t entry press CLEAR and enter the new name Display example PSO1 EXT 281 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Each PS extension number can be two through four digits consisting of 0 through 9 The X and keys cannot be used e A PS extension number can also be assigned in programme 650 PS Registration e A PS extension number is invalid if the first or second digits do not match with the setting in programme 100 Flexible Numbering 01 16 1st through 16th hundred extension DECT Programming 373 5 3 Extension Programming blocks If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some PS extension numbers have two or three digits If two digits are assigned they have three digits and some may have four digits Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers areinvalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 through 264 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 178 KX TD1232 165 through 180 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored
271. t mode selects the destination 0 DIL 1 N 1 DDI of incoming DDI numbers or MSN 1 operator MSN Ringing numbers when 0 is assigned in Service programmes 151 1 52 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night and 448 44 9 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 9 Assigns whether a new page is ejected 0 disable 0 Hotel Application or not when the Hotel Application is 1 enable printed out by SMDR 10 When Timed Reminder starts and is not 0 disable 1 Timed Reminder answered this programme enables or 1 enable disables the SMDR printout for Timed Reminder 11 Enables or disables to send a COLP 0 enable 1 COLP number 1 disable CLIR COLR 12 16 Reserved E amp M Programming 335 4 6 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 06 1 Sets the time after terminating the 0 0s 1 DISA OGM 1 5s OGM 2 Determines whether the account code is 0 shown in dots 1 SMDR printed out or not shown in dots by the 1 shown SMDR 3 5 Reserved disable 1 Voice Mail enable Integration 6 Selects the result when an outside call is routed by Call Forwarding to a voice mail port which is in the AA service mode For both Inband and DPT Integration disable AA service mode enable The mode will change to the VM service mode and a Follow On ID is sent When the voice mail port is in the VM
272. t you should do now what you have done etc The KX T7533 KX T7536 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7230 and the KX T7235 utilise two information lines for programming The upper line is called the Message Line and the lower one is called the Function Line The Message Line upper shows you what you should do or what you should select It also allows you to confirm what you have just entered The display capacity is 16 digits If your entry exceeds the capacity you can shift the display by pressing Wi or lt button The Function Line lower shows the current function of the soft buttons These functions change with the programming procedures SSPE NOR gt lt Message Line CLR NEXT Function Line 2 Line Display gs 5 i SYS PGM NO lt Message Line SYS PGM NO gt lt Message Line CLR lt Function Line CLR NEXT lt Function Line 3 Line Display 6 Line Display Before entering the programming mode Before entering programming mode confirm that Your telephone is on hook Nocalls are on hold at your telephone Entering the programming mode Press PROGRAM or PAUSE x and enter your System Password default 1234 e The display shows the Initial Message SYG PGM NO If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button substitute it with the PAUSE button e fnothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM or PAUSE button is pressed it is
273. tary telephone jack is treated as the manager operator extension General Programming 4 2 1 Manager Programming Features Guide References Manager Extension Operator 42 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 007 Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment Description Assigns the jack numbers for the console and the paired extension Selection Console number KX TD816 1 through 4 KX TD1232 1 through 4 for Master 5 through 8 for Slave Jack number for Console KX TD816 02 through 16 KX TD1232 02 through 32 for Master 33 through 64 for Slave Jack number for paired extension KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 32 for Master 33 through 64 for Slave Default All consoles Not stored Programming 1 Enter 007 Display DSS Console Asn 2 Press NEXT Display DSS NO 3 Enter a console number To enter console number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example DSS 1 4 P 4 Enter a jack number for the console To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number 5 Press Wb 6 Enter a jack number for the paired extension To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number Display example DSS 1 02 P 03 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another console press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired console number 9 Repeat steps
274. tem waits for a second digit entry If the timer expires the system assumes that the first digit is a DISA Direct Inward System Access built in automated attendant number if assigned in progra mme 818 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number Selection Time seconds 1 through 5 Default 1s Programming 1 Enter 221 Displ lay DISA AA WAIT 2 Press NEXT Displ lay example Time 1 sec 3 Enter the time To cha nge the current entry enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA General Programming 121 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 300 T RS Override for System Speed Dialling Description Allows you to enable toll restriction override for System Speed Dial Numbers If this is enabled all extension users can make System Speed Dialling calls with no restriction Selection Enable Disable Default Disable Programming 1 Enter 300 Display SPD Override 2 Press NEXT Display example Override Disable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Select Enable for toll restriction override Select Disable for toll restriction Features Guide References Toll Restriction 122 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 301 305 T RS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2
275. ter a phantom extension number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location numbe 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Each phantom extension number has two through four digits consisting of numbers 0 through 9 The first one or two digits of the phantom extension numbers are subject to programme 10 O Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks Phantom extension numbers and other extension numbers should be different Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 General Programming 93 2 2 System Programming To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 through 264 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 178 KX TD1232 165 through 180 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 199 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 199 291 through 294 296 through 299 671 PS Extensio
276. the desired DISA TIE user code number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions This setting is required if Trunk Outside line Security mode is selected in programmes 44 OJ TIE Security Type and 8 09 DISA Security Type 204 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming e Each code should be unique and composed of four through ten numerical digits 0 through 9 e You cannot leave an entry empty Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA E amp M TIE Line Service General Programming 205 2 8 Resource Programming 812 D ISA DTMF Repeat Description Selects whether the system transmits DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals directly to the central office CO or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to CO in order to adjust gain This can be done for an outside to outside line call via the Direct Inward System Access DISA feature during dialling and or during an established call Selection Dial during dialling Call during an established call Mode Repeat Through Default Dial and Call Repeat Programming 1 Enter 812 Display DISA DTMF Repeat 2 Press NEXT to programme the mode during dialling To programme the mode during an established call press NEXT again Display example Dial Repeat 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to programme the mode during an established
277. the parameter press CLEAR and enter the new parameter 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another CO button of the same jack repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another jack press SELECT and repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END Cancelling 1 Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above 2 Enter 2 3 Press STORE 4 Press END Conditions Acentralised telephone is a telephone connected to jack 01 or a jack programmed as a manager extension in programme 006 Op erator Manager Extension Assignment General Programming 39 2 1 Manager Programming Forthe KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable The number of the CO buttons available depends on the telephone type Refer to Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and Consoles in the Features Guide For the KX T7500 series telephones 24 CO buttons can be programmed by adding 12 CO buttons by connecting the KX T7545 Add on key Module If you press the same CO button again in step 5 you can select a desired ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring tones When you enter the tone type number 1 through 8 you will hear the selected tone type until STORE is pressed This selection is possible only for the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single CO Group CO or Loop CO Features Guide References Butt
278. ther PBX 9 Enables or disables the ARS with 0 enable 1 ARS DTMF function 1 disable 11 10 Assigns the source of Music Source 1 00 internal music 00 e BGM for Music on Hold and BGM source Music on Hold 01 external music source 11 tone 12 Reserved 13 Enables or disables dial tone 2 when an 0 disable 1 Dial Tone extension sets programmable extension 1 enable Distinctive features such as Call Waiting 14 Enables or disables the Whisper OHCA 0 any telephone 1 Whisper OHCA feature 1 KX T7500 and KX T7400 series telephone only 15 16 Reserved 220 General Programming 2 9 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 07 1 3 Reserved 4 Allows to access an outside line has the 0 enable 1 Outside Line lowest number among idle lines with 1 disable Access priority Automatic 5 Reserved 6 Selects the result when a DISA DDI 0 reorder tone is 1 None MSN TIE call is invalid sent 1 IRNA 7 Selects the result when a DISA DDI 0 IRNA 1 None MSN TIE call arrives at a busy 1 busy tone is extension which has disabled Call sent Waiting 8 Selects the forwarding destination when 0 destination of 1 Call Forwarding an outside call is transferred from an intercom calls extension or the VPS to an extension 1 destination of wher
279. through 6 Description These allow you to specify the numbers which are toll restricted for each toll restriction level as follows Programme 301 restricts levels 2 through 6 Programme 302 restricts levels 3 through 6 Programme 303 restricts levels 4 through 6 Programme 304 restricts levels 5 through 6 Programme 305 restricts level 6 Selection Location number 01 through 20 Toll call number 7 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a programme address 301 through 305 Display example TRS Deny LVL 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored Enter a toll call number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END General Programming 123 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Conditions e There is a maximum of 20 toll call numbers which can be restricted for each programme Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character X can be used as a wild card character e Programmes 306 310 JTRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 are used to assign exceptions to these
280. til the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 Press END Un Conditions To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group number 1 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service E amp M Programming 323 4 4 TIE Line Programming 442 Voice Path Type Description Assigns the voice path type on an outside line basis Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 05 through 08 KX TD1232 09 through 12 Master 21 through 24 Slave X all outside lines 2wire 4 wire Default All outside lines 2 wire Programming 1 Enter 442 Display Voice Path Type 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 09 you can also press NEXT Display example CO09 2 Wire 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 Press END Conditions To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 Features Guide References E amp M TIE Line Service 324 E amp M Programming 44 TIE Line Programming 443 Voice Level Transmit Description Assigns the transmitted voice level on an outside line port basis This programme is valid only when the voice path type is set to 4 wire Selection Outside line CO number KX TD816 05
281. tion Assigns a destination location of incoming Direct Dialling In DDI numbers Incoming DDI numbers are received at extensions assigned to each location number Selection Location number 000 through 399 DDI number 16 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 150 Display DDI Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 3 Enter a location numbe To enter location number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a DDI numbe To delete the current entry press CLEA To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions The DDI number can be a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e Programmes 151 152 DDI Ringing Assignment Day Night are used to assign an extension to each location number in the day and night modes e To assign a destination location of incoming DDI numbers select DDI in programme 452 4 53 ISDN Ring Service Assignment Day Night first 244 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDI Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 245 3 2 System Programming 151 152 D DI Ringing Assignment Day Night Desc
282. tion 612 I ncoming Call Display and duration time Display 676 P S Incoming Call Display changes after answering an incoming call or not 12 Selects how long the system keeps the 0 35s 1 Door Opener door opener unlocked 1 5s 13 Enables or disables the automatic time 0 enable 1 ISDN adjustment The time is automatically 1 disable adjusted when the first call after 3 00 AM is received 14 Selects the bearer when using a single 0 Speech 1 ISDN line telephone 1 3 1k Audio DECT Programming 391 5 4 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 07 15 Selects the bearer when using a proprietary telephone or DECT portable station 3 1k Audio Speech ISDN 16 Reserved 08 Reserved Enables or disables the MCID service even after the caller hangs up If enabled the call will not be disconnected until you go on hook enable disable Malicious Call Identification MCID 3 16 Reserved Selection Default See Default shown in the explanation table Area code 01 through 08 Selection See Selection in the explanation table Programming 1 Un A o0 1 Enter 990 Display System Add Inf Press NEXT Display Area NO Enter an area code 01 through 08 Display example 0010100011000001 Keep pressing mto n a
283. ts and added number to a subscriber s number and a DDI number sent from the network Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports e Removed digits 0 through 16 O no deleting Added number 4 digits max Default All ports Removed digit 0 Added number Not stored Programming 1 Enter 421 Display DDI MSN RMV Add 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter an port numbe To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 O0 4 Enter the digit s to be deleted To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press gt Display example 01 3 6 Enter the number s to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 7 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 8 Press STORE 9 Press END 252 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Conditions e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and port numbers 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e Each added number has a maximum of four digits consisting of 0 through 9 To assign all ports to the same number press the X key in step 3 In this case the display will show the contents programmed for Port 01 Example If the removed digits are assigned as 6 and the added number is assigned as 2 the number sent from the ne
284. tside line 1 retry conversation If disabled X will simply be dialled 11 Selects whether the display which is 0 not change 1 Incoming Outside assigned in programme 1 change to Call Information 612 Incoming Call Display and duration time Display 676 PS Incoming Call Display changes after answering an incoming call or not 12 Selects how long the system keeps the 0 3s 1 Door Opener door opener unlocked 1 5s 13 Enables or disables the automatic time 0 enable 1 ISDN adjustment The time is automatically 1 disable adjusted when the first call after 3 00 AM is received 14 Selects the bearer when using a single 0 Speech 1 ISDN line telephone 1 3 1k Audio 338 E amp M Programming 4 6 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 07 15 Selects the bearer when using a 0 3 1k Audio 1 ISDN proprietary telephone or DECT portable 1 Speech station 16 Reserved 08 1 Reserved 2 Enables or disables the MCID service 0 enable 1 Malicious Call even after the caller hangs up If 1 disable Identification enabled the call will not be MCID disconnected until you go on hook 3 16 Reserved Selection e Area code 01 through 08 e Selection See Selection in the explanation table Default See Default shown in the explanation table Programming 1 Enter 990 Display System Add Inf 2 Pres
285. tside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Pulse 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END 140 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available Toassign all lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 If DTMF is assigned set the DTMF time of the line in programme 40 4 DTMF Time e If pulse or call blocking is assigned set the pulse speed of the line in programme 40 3 Pulse Speed Selection and set the pulse break ratio and inter digit pause in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 bit 7 and bits 12 and 11 if necessary Features Guide References Dial Type Selection General Programming 141 2 5 Outside Line Programming 403 P ulse Speed Selection Description An outside line set for pulse or call blocking mode in program me 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two pulse rates 10 pps low and 20 pps high This programme sets the pulse speed for each outside line set to pulse or call blocking mode
286. twork will be changed as follows 85492603 Six digits are deleted and 2 is added and the number becomes 203 Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDI Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN Ringing Service ISDN Programming 253 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 424 I SDN Port Type Description Assigns the type of each port to either outside line or extension line on an ISDN port basis Selection Default Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports CO outside line Extension All ports CO Programming 1 Enter 424 Display ISDN Line Type Press NEXT Display Port NO Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 CO Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions For the KX TD816 port numbers 05 and 06 are fixed as Extension For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective 254 ISDN Programming 3 3
287. u can also press NEXT Display example COS1 1 4 Enter a level number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 General Programming 161 2 6 COS Programming Features Guide References Night Service Toll Restriction 162 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 502 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit Description This programme allows you to restrict the duration of outside calls on a Class of Service COS basis Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Disable no limit Enable limit Default AII COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 502 Display CO Durat Limit 2 Press NEXT 3 Display COS NO 4 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 6 9 Press END Conditions Anoutside call originated or answered by the programmed extension user is disconnected when the time specified in prog
288. ugh 264 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 199 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 199 291 through 294 296 through 299 671 PS Extension Number Set Not stored Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 80 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 119 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment Description Assigns each voice mail number to a voice mail extension group number This programme is available when this system is connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP200 Selection e Voice mail number VM KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 16 X all voice mail numbers Voice mail extension group number EXG 1 through 8 Default All voice mail numbers EXG 1 Programming 1 Enter 119 Display VM EXT Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display VM NO 3 Enter a voice mail number To enter voice mail number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example VM 01 02 1 EXGI1 4 Enter the voice mail extension group numbe To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another voice mail number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT
289. using the same line If 0 disconnection signal is selected in Area 01 bit 3 above this 1s also allowed for those extensions that have the Account Code Verified All Calls mode assigned 6 Allows you to remove confirmation tone 0 disable 1 Confirmation 3 This tone is sent when a conversation 1 enable Tone General Programming 215 2 9 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Feature Guide References 02 7 An outside line set to pulse or call 0 60 0 Dial Type blocking mode in programme 1 67 Selection 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing Select an appropriate ratio depending on the standard in your country 8 Determines whether an extension 0 extension 0 Voice Mail mailbox number is substituted by the number Integration extension number or itis programmable 1 free free If a call is forwarded or rerouted to the VPS this system automatically transmits the mailbox number to the VPS to specify the user s mailbox To make it programmable select 1 free then assign the number in programme 609 Voice Mail Access Codes and 665 PSVoice Mail Access Codes 9 Determines the initial display of a 0 names 0 Call Directory digital display proprietary telephone 1 numbers except for KX T7230 in Station Speed Dialling 10 Reserved 12 11
290. ut Assignment 318 TIE to Outside Transfer 321 TIE to TIE Transfer 322 Time 28 Timed Reminder 218 290 335 388 Timed Reminder Alarm Interval Time 120 Timed Reminder Alarm Repeat Times 119 Toll Restriction 215 287 332 385 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 161 Transfer Recall 215 287 332 385 Transfer Recall Time 103 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 123 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 125 TRS Override for System Speed Dialling 122 Two Way Record button 38 228 342 Two Way Transfer button 38 228 342 U UCD Uniform Call Distribution 389 91 UCD hunting 65 UCD Overflow 89 UCD Time Table 91 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 89 91 412 Index Unit location 69 241 302 348 Unit Type 69 241 302 348 User Password 22 88 User Programming 10 22 88 V Verified All Calls mode 170 Verified Toll Restriction Override mode 170 VM Command DTMF Set 73 VM hunting 65 VM Service 73 219 291 336 389 VM Status DTMF Set 71 Voice Level Receive 326 Voice Level Transmit 325 Voice Mail VM Service 73 219 291 336 389 Voice Mail Access Codes 185 216 288 333 371 386 Voice Mail Extension 79 Voice Mail Extension Group 81 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment 81 Voice Mail Extension Number Set 79 Voice Mail Number Assignment 77 Voice Mail Transfer button 38 228 342 Voice Path Type 324 Voice Processing Syst
291. utside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Each number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 248 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available e To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press wi or lt lt Outside lines 25 through 54 become available when the KX TD290 expansion unit is installed in the KX TD1232 e Your telephone number will be informed to the called party if the outgoing CLIR feature is disabled for the ISDN line in programme 4 1 9 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment e Your telephone number will be informed to the calling party if the COLP feature is disabled for the ISDN line in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 5 bit 11 Features Guide References Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Call Log Incoming Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Incoming Outside Call Information Display ISDN Programming 249 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 419 I SDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment Description Assigns whether ISDN CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction service is enabled or disabled for outgoing outside calls If disabl
292. ws 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 178 KX TD1232 165 through 180 130 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 199 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 199 291 through 294 296 through 299 671 PS Extension Number Set Not stored e Programme 004 Extension Name Set is used to name the extension numbers Features Guide References Call Directory Display Message EXtra Device Port XDP Flexible Numbering Intercom Calling General Programming 35 2 1 Manager Programming 004 E xtension Name Set Description Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in program me 003 Extension Number Set Selection Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part Name 10 characters max Default All jacks Not stored Programming 1 Enter 004 Display EXT Name Set 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press C

Digital Super Hybrid System Programming Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents